JP2010167243A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine, in which a second control means controls the display based on command information transmitted from a first control means, capable of optimizing a display system. <P>SOLUTION: An MPU 62 of a main control device 60 acquires information on reservation based on entrance of a game ball into an actuation hole, and determines a win or miss for the information on reservation. When a win or miss is determined, a command for variation, or the like is transmitted from the MPU 62. When the command for variation is received, an MPU 102 of a display control device 100 executes a process of starting presentation for a game round in a symbol display device 31. The MPU 102 controls the display in the symbol display device 31 so that the number of information on reservation stored in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 can be recognized and the number of information on reservation can be announced. In this case, the MPU 102 stops the announcement of the number of information on reservation when an abnormality in communication for the command for variation occurs. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2010,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is known that includes a picture display device that displays a plurality of pictures on a display screen. In such a gaming machine, for example, when a game ball passes through an operation port provided in a gaming area, a winning lottery is performed and a display of a change in a picture is started. When the winning lottery is won, a combination of specific patterns and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state.

  By the way, in recent years, for example, a main control device is provided as the first control means, and based on command information transmitted by the main control device, that is, a command is directly received from the main control device, or from the main control device. For example, a display control device is provided as the second control means for controlling the display of the picture display device in response to a command from another control device that has received the command, and is displayed on the display screen while reducing the processing load of the main control device. A game machine that aims to diversify display effects is becoming common. For example, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the main control device determines the hit type, display duration, etc., and the display control device controls display of the picture display device based on the determination results (for example, patents). Reference 1).

  In more detail about an example of the above gaming machine, the main control device uses a change pattern determination command used in the display control device to determine the display duration of the pattern and the display mode of the pattern, and the stop pattern in the display control device. A stop symbol determination command used for determination and a final stop command used for final stop display of the pattern are transmitted. The display control device starts display of the variation of the pattern based on the reception of the variation pattern determination command, and displays the variation of the pattern in a predetermined manner, for example, high-speed variation display → medium-speed variation display → low-speed variation display. When the display continuation period that has already been determined has elapsed, a combination of symbols corresponding to the stop symbol determination command is made to wait in a predetermined standby area. Thereafter, based on the reception of the final stop command, the final stop display is performed so that each picture is in a stationary state.

JP 2004-81853 A

  Here, it is preferable that the configuration in which the display control is performed in the display control device based on the command transmitted from the main control device as described above is more effective. In this regard, there is still room for improvement in display systems such as a configuration related to communication using commands and a configuration related to how to display a pattern.

  In addition, the said problem is a problem which arises similarly also in the other game machine in which display control is performed in the 2nd control means based on the command information transmitted from the 1st control means.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and is suitable for a display system in a gaming machine in which display control is performed by the second control means based on command information transmitted from the first control means. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be realized.

  Hereinafter, means for solving the above problems will be described.

The invention according to claim 1 includes a display unit, a first control unit and a second control unit,
Based on the information transmitted from the first control means, the display means is controlled by the second control means so that a special display is performed,
The first control means includes
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, Information determination means for sequentially performing the determination for a plurality of special information;
Number recognition information transmitting means for transmitting number recognition information which is information used when the second control means grasps the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
With
The second control means includes
Special information number grasping means for grasping the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means based on receiving the number recognition information;
Based on the grasp result of the special information number grasping means, a notification executing means for notifying the display means of the number of the special information;
Even in a situation where the number of the special information grasped by the special information number grasping means is 1 or more, the special execution information of the special information by the notification executing means is based on the fact that a predetermined stop condition is established. Notification stopping means for stopping the notification of the number;
It is characterized by having.

The invention according to claim 2 includes a display unit, a first control unit and a second control unit,
Based on the information transmitted from the first control means, the display means is controlled by the second control means so that a special display is performed,
The first control means includes
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, Information determination means for sequentially performing the determination for a plurality of special information;
Based on the determination by the information determination means, information transmission means for transmitting command information corresponding to the determination result;
Number recognition information transmitting means for transmitting number recognition information which is information used when the second control means grasps the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
With
The second control means includes
Special display execution means for causing the display means to execute a special display corresponding to the received command information, based on receiving the command information;
Special information number grasping means for grasping the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means based on receiving the number recognition information;
Based on the grasp result of the special information number grasping means, the notification executing means for notifying the number of the special information on the display means or a display means different from the display information;
Even if the number of the special information grasped by the special information number grasping means is 1 or more, the notification is performed based on the fact that a predetermined stop condition is established after the execution of the special display. Notification stopping means for stopping notification of the number of the special information by the execution means;
It is characterized by having.

  In a gaming machine in which display control is performed by the second control means based on the command information transmitted from the first control means, it is possible to make the display system suitable.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a lottery lottery etc. (A)-(j) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows a normal process. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. The flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. The flowchart which shows the display control process in MPU of a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation start. (A) Explanatory diagram for explaining the display side time table, (b-1) Explanatory diagram for explaining the game times counter area, (b-2) Information on the mismatch period in the game times counter area Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a set state. The flowchart which shows the process for fluctuation | variation. The timing chart which shows the mode of display control when a display continuation period is normally specified from the command for a fluctuation | variation. The flowchart which shows the opening setting process for mismatch. The timing chart which shows the mode of display control when a display continuation period is not normally specified from the command for a fluctuation | variation. The flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation start in 2nd Embodiment. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. The flowchart which shows the winning process for the operation port in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows a data setting process. The flowchart which shows the display control process in MPU of a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows a command confirmation process. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process after a still display. The flowchart which shows the process for a hold display. The timing chart for demonstrating the mode of switching of display of a hold display area, and non-display. The flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation start. The flowchart which shows the process for fluctuation | variation. The timing chart for demonstrating the effect for game times of the mode for abnormalities. The timing chart for demonstrating a mode that the effect for game times is complete | finished based on reception of the command for a fluctuation | variation. (A) The flowchart which shows the command confirmation process in 4th Embodiment, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the information form of a predetermined command. 10 is a flowchart illustrating command confirmation processing according to the fifth embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

  The inner frame of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions serving as a support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated forward by using one of the left and right side portions as a support side. Further, the back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated rearward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side.

  Note that the gaming machine body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. In addition, the front door frame 14 has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  A game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. Here, the structure of the game board 20 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 20.

  The game board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion) 23, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion) 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, A main display unit 33, an accessory display unit 34, and the like are provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, and the lower operating port 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 20, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out.

  In addition, an out port 27 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 20, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 27. The game board 20 is provided with a large number of nails 28 for dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 27, the game ball enters the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24 or the through gate 25. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 20. Both the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 23 and 24 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 23 is on the upper side. The lower working port 24 is provided with an electric accessory 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) of the electric accessory 24a, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 24, and the electric operating member 24a is in the open state (supported state or guide state). It is possible to win 24.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a large winning opening 22a that leads to the back side of the game board 20, and an open / close door 22b that opens and closes the large winning opening 22a. The open / close door 22b is normally in a closed state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and a predetermined game ball is likely to win when winning the opening / closing execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As a release mode of the variable winning device 22, the variable winning device 22 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  In the main display unit 33, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is achieved. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the display is clearly shown. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 23 and the winning to the lower working port 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and are performed based on the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. The result of the internal lottery is displayed on the main display section 33 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 33. After the display and the change display are stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The main display unit 33 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the main display unit 33 is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed on the main display unit 33, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  The accessory display unit 34 displays a variation of the picture triggered by a winning to the through gate 25, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 25 as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 25 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 34 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 24a provided in the lower working port 24 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 for variably displaying a symbol which is a kind of symbol (or variable display or switching display), and a center frame 32 is provided so as to surround the symbol display device 31. Has been. The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and a dot matrix display. It may be a vessel.

  On the symbol display device 31, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the change display on the symbol display device 31 is started based on winning in the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. That is, when variable display is performed on the main display unit 33, variable display is performed on the symbol display device 31 accordingly. Then, for example, the symbol display device 31 is set in advance to a game number of times that shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds, in which the large winning opening 22a of the variable winning device 22 is opened 15 times as the opening / closing execution mode. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  By the way, based on the winning at any one of the operating ports 23, 24, the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 start the variable display, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the internal lottery (win / fail determination process described later) Is displayed, and the variation display is finally stopped until the variation display is completed.

  A first holding lamp portion 35 corresponding to the main display portion 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided at the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 32. A maximum of four game balls won in the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 are reserved, and the number of reservations is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 35 is turned on.

  In the upper right portion of the center frame 32, a second holding lamp portion 36 corresponding to the accessory display portion 34 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 25 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of the held balls is displayed by turning on the second holding lamp portion 36. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the function of each holding | maintenance lamp | ramp part 35 and 36 is fulfill | performed by the display in the one part area | region of the symbol display apparatus 31. FIG.

  An inner rail portion 41 and an outer rail portion 42 are attached to the game board 20, and a guide rail is configured by the inner rail portion 41 and the outer rail portion 42, and is mounted below the game board 20 in the inner frame. A game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism (not shown) is guided to the upper part of the game area. The game ball launching mechanism launches a game ball by operating a launch handle 51 provided on the front door frame 14.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 52 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window part 52 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 53 is fitted therein. The window panel 53 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed of colorless and transparent with a synthetic resin. Incidentally, the display screen of the symbol display device 31 and the main display section 33 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 53.

  Around the window portion 52, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided. A display lamp part 54 is provided above the window part 52 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 54, speaker units 55 for outputting sound effects according to the game situation are provided.

  Below the window portion 52 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 56 and a lower bulging portion 57 that bulge to the near side are arranged side by side. An upper plate 56a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 56, and a lower plate 57a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 57. The upper plate 56a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 57a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 56a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 56a and the lower plate 57a.

  A main control device, an audio lamp control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, as described above, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame. The back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, a power source and a firing control device. Is installed. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. In the main controller 60, a substrate box that accommodates the main control substrate 61 or the like is provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. It may be. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer is attached by peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 65 and a payout control device 70 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. In this case, the power failure monitoring board 65 is connected to a power supply and launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 62 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 65.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. Each of the various winning detection sensors 67a to 67e has a one-to-one detection with respect to a winning-corresponding pitched portion such as a general winning port 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating port 23, a lower operating port 24, and a through gate 25. A sensor is included, and the MPU 62 performs a winning determination (entering determination) for each entering part. In addition, the MPU 62 executes a lottery occurrence lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on winning to the upper operation port 23 and the lower operation port 24, and also executes a reach generation lottery and a display continuation time determination lottery for each game time. The

  Here, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 62 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 62 uses lots of counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 33, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 31, setting of display of the accessory display unit 34, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type of the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the display device 31 fluctuates and fluctuates, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, the display on the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 A variation type counter CS that determines the duration is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 24a of the lower working port 24 is in the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among these, in the lottery counter buffer, the information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is obtained information storage means when a winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 occurs. Is stored in a reserved ball storage area 64a.

  The holding ball storage area 64a includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. The combination of numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 are stored on hold. In addition, the holding area RE includes a holding number storage area NA, in order to specify the number in which the winning history to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is stored in the holding number storage area NA. Is stored.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display on the main display unit 33, and at the start of one game round. Is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 63a as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 63. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) and a high probability mode's success / failure table (high probability success / failure information group) are set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the low-probability mode winning / failing table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, (1) a winning / no-win lottery mode in the corresponding lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode in the electric accessory 24a of the lower working port 24 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Multiple jackpot results are set by making a difference between the two conditions. As above-mentioned lottery mode, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as described above.

  As a support mode, when compared with a situation in which a game ball is continuously fired in the same manner with respect to the game area, there is a frequency that the electric accessory 24a of the lower working port 24 is in an open state per unit time. The low frequency support mode (the low frequency support state or the low frequency guide state) and the high frequency support mode (the high frequency support state or the high frequency guide state) are set so as to be relatively high and low.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric utility item 24a is opened is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 24a occurs a plurality of times, the closed state from the end of one open state until the next open state is started The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, a shorter time is selected as the reserved time that is secured after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed than in the low-frequency support mode. Is set to be.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize to the lower working port 24 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be generated in the upper operating port 23 than in the lower operating port 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 24 is connected to the lower operating port 24. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is awarded to the lower operating port 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which makes high the probability that it will be elected in the electric character open state in. In addition, a secured time (for example, on the display part 34 based on a winning to the through gate 25) secured after the next electrification opening lottery is performed after the first electrification opening lottery is performed. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the short support time is more easily selected in the high frequency support mode or the average secure time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured when the next electric winning combination opening lottery is performed after the first electric winning combination releasing lottery is shortened (that is, , Shorten the display duration for one time in the display 34 for an accessory), shorten the average time of the reserved time and increase the winning probability, and apply any one condition or any combination of conditions Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 63b as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 63. Then, a normal jackpot result (low probability special game result) and a probability variable jackpot result (high probability special game result) are set as the distribution destinations.

  The normal jackpot result is that the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the support frequency is high until the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the support mode shifts. It is a jackpot result that becomes a mode. After the end reference count has elapsed, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

  The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that.

  In the distribution table, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, but this numerical distribution is arbitrary. In addition, the distribution destination of the jackpot result is not limited to the above two types. For example, in the opening / closing execution mode, a plurality of modes are set so that the expected value of the game ball is high and the opening / closing execution is performed. It is good also as a structure which increases the type of jackpot result rather than said two types by providing a difference in the mode transfer destination mode.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 31. Expected effects include a symbol display device 31 that can perform variable display (or variable display) of symbols (patterns), and variable display in game times where the open / close execution mode of the variable winning device 22 is the high-frequency winning mode. In the gaming machine in which the subsequent stop result becomes the grant response result, the variable display that tends to become the grant response result before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol (picture) change display on the symbol display device 31 is started. A display state that makes the player think that the state is in effect.

  The expectation effect includes two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the corresponding result at the stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 31, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner is included in the column. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  In the notice display, the symbol display on the display screen of the symbol display device 31 is started in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started, or in some symbol columns. In a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect, and what makes the symbol on the symbol row | line | columns Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also contained. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode. In the game times that do not shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing is referred to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 63 in response to the occurrence of the reach display. It is executed when On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is performed not by the main control device 60 but by the display control device 100.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines a display continuation period on the main display unit 33 and a symbol display continuation period on the symbol display device 31. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the main display unit 33 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 31.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric utility reservation area of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 24a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

  As already described, in the MPU 62, the display continuation period in the main display unit 33 is determined using at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS, and the main time table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is used for the determination. It is done.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 3, the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound lamp control device 90 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, the payout control device 70 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound lamp control device 90. In this case, the command information storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the sound lamp control device 90 is electrically connected to the main control device 60 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive unit 22c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22, an electric combination driving unit 24b that opens and closes the electric combination 24a of the lower working port 24, and a main display unit. 33 and the accessory display unit 34 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 22c so that the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric combination 24a is won, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 24b so that the electric combination 24a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the main display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 62. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 24a is to be opened is clearly indicated, display control of the accessory display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 62.

  The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply and launch control device 80, and monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 60.

  The power source and launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. And based on the external electric power supplied from the commercial power supply, the necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. The power supply and launch control device 80 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81, and the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound lamp control device 90 receives a game time control command (game time control command information) such as a variation command and a type command from the main control device 60. Also, a game state command (game state information) such as an opening command is received. The sound lamp control device 90 controls driving of the various lamp portions 35, 36, 54 and the speaker portion 55 provided on the front door frame 14 based on the reception of these commands. Further, these commands are transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 while maintaining the information form as it is. Incidentally, the audio lamp control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The display control apparatus 100 includes a display control board 101 on which an MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107 are mounted. It has. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 60 via the sound lamp control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, internal commands for the VDP 105). Generation).

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data. In other words, the program ROM 103 is a memory used for read-only purposes when various controls are executed by the MPU 102. The program ROM 103 is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply when storing stored information. A part of the fixed value data is stored in advance in each area 111 to 116 of the program ROM 103. Details of these areas 111 to 116 will be described together with the description of the processing executed by the MPU 102.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs. In other words, the work RAM 104 is a memory used for both writing and reading when various controls are executed by the MPU 102. The work RAM 104 is a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold stored information. Work data, a flag, etc. are memorize | stored in each area 121-125 of the work RAM104. Details of these areas 121 to 125 will be described together with the description of the processing executed by the MPU 102.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 105 can be said to be a microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 31.

  The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 31. The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 31, and the display contents of the symbol display device 31 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

  Here, the display content of the symbol display device 31 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, standby areas SA1 to SA9 are set on the display screen G so that three symbols are displayed for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As a result, 3 × 3 A total of nine symbols are displayed simultaneously. Incidentally, each standby area SA1 to SA9 includes a stop position, and when the symbol is displayed as a final stop, the symbols waiting in each standby area SA1 to SA9 are stopped at each stop position. Is displayed.

  In addition, the display screen G includes five effective lines extending across the entire display area and connecting the three standby areas SA1 to SA9, that is, the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the right descending line L4, and the right A rising line L5 is set. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the variation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the probability variation jackpot result.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and if a probabilistic jackpot result occurs, a combination of the same specific symbols Is stopped. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. The

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variable display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-described pattern. For example, only a numeral may be variably displayed as the pattern.

<Various processes executed by main controller 60>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 62 in the main controller 60 advances the game at each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 62 executes a main process that is started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 62 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various detection sensor reading processes are executed. The reading process includes a process of reading the states of the various winning detection sensors 67a to 67e, determining the states of the various winning detection sensors 67a to 67e, and storing the winning detection information. In the subsequent step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  In subsequent step S104, a through winning process is performed in accordance with winning through the through gate 25. In the through winning process, if a winning to the through gate 25 has occurred, the number of stored bonus items stored in the electronic role holding area is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”). As a condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric utility reservation area. Moreover, the process for making the audio lamp control apparatus 90 light the 2nd reservation lamp | ramp part 36 corresponding to the number of accessory reservation memory | storage is performed.

  In a succeeding step S105, a winning process for the operating port accompanying winning in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is executed. In the winning process for the operating port, when a winning is made to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24, the start reserved memory number stored in the reserved ball storage area 64a is the upper limit number (for example, “ 4)), the numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 64a. . In this case, the data is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the current start reserved memory number. In addition, a process for turning on the first hold lamp unit 35 corresponding to the start hold storage number is executed for the voice lamp control device 90. After executing the process of step S105, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when a game time control command or a game state command is set, it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90.

  In the subsequent step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  In subsequent step S203, a game number control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In this game times control process, jackpot determination, symbol variable display setting by the symbol display device 31, display control of the main display unit 33, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S204, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In a succeeding step S205, an electric combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 24a provided in the lower operation port 24 is executed. In this electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 24a is opened using the information stored in the electric utility reservation area of the RAM 64, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 24a, and the display for the accessory The display control of the unit 34 is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S206, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 is excited once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power source and launch control device 80. . Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In a succeeding step S207, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is stored in the RAM 64. The power failure flag is a flag that is stored when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 65 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62 and is erased in the next main processing.

  When the power failure flag is not stored, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed, so whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in step S208, that is, the previous normal process It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing. That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S210, the variation type counter CS is updated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 207 that the power failure flag is stored, the power interruption has occurred, so the power interruption processing from step S211 is executed. That is, in step S211, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and after that, the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in step S212. After the access of the RAM 64 is prohibited in step S213, the power supply is completely shut down and processed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process of step S203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. When in the opening / closing execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processing after step S302, that is, the game turn start processing at steps S303 to S305 and the game turn progress processing at steps S306 to S308. End control processing. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a prize is generated for the operation ports 23 and 24.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S302 whether or not the main display unit 33 is in a variable display. When the main display unit 33 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn starting process in steps S303 to S305. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S303, the reserved number storage area NA of the reserved ball storage area 64a is referred to, and whether or not the start reserved memory number N that is the number of reserved information stored is “0”. Determine whether. The case where the start hold storage number N is “0” means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 64a. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is. If the start pending storage number N is not “0”, a data setting process is executed in step S304.

  In the data setting process, first, the start pending storage number N is decremented by one. Further, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE in the holding ball storage area 64a is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3.

  In the data setting process, a process for causing the voice lamp control device 90 to recognize that the hold information has been shifted and changing the display on the first hold lamp unit 35 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold is executed. To do.

  After executing the data setting process, the game start control process is terminated after the change start process is executed in step S305. Here, the variation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S401, a validity determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a, the information for the success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, It is determined whether or not the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical value relating to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with reference to the low probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a. It is determined whether or not the information matches the low probability jackpot information.

  In a succeeding step S402, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in the step S401 is a jackpot winning result. If it is a big win result, a type determination process is executed in step S403.

  In the type determination process, information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 63b, it is specified to which jackpot type the numerical information related to the above-obtained jackpot type counter C2 corresponds.

  In subsequent step S404, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type identified in the type determination process in step S403 corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result. If the probability variation jackpot result is supported, stop result setting processing for probability variation jackpot is executed in step S405, and if not the probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed in step S406. To do. Furthermore, when it is determined that the result of the success / failure determination process in step S401 is not the big hit winning result (step S402: NO), a stop result setting process for losing is executed in step S407.

  In the stop result setting process in steps S405 to S407, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 is specified from information stored in advance in the ROM 63, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64. To do. In step S405 and step S406, the RAM 64 stores information for specifying in the MPU 62 that the current game times determination result is the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result. Specifically, the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in step S405, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in step S406.

  After executing any one of steps S405 to S407, a display continuation period setting process is executed in step S408.

  In this process, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 is acquired. Further, it is determined whether or not a reach display is generated in the symbol display device 31 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64. If any flag is stored, it is determined that reach display occurs. Even if none of the above flags is stored, if the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, the reach is reached. It is determined that a display occurs.

  When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the display continuation display corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is made with reference to the reach generation display continuation period table stored in the main time table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. The period information is acquired, and the display continuation period information is set in the display continuation period counter area provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the value corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is referred to by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the main time table storage area 63c. The display duration is acquired, and the display duration information is set in the display duration counter area. Incidentally, the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence variation display table is different from the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach occurrence display duration table.

  Note that the display continuation period information when no reach occurs is set so that the display continuation period is shortened as the number of the start pending storage numbers N increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach mode is selected so that a shorter display continuation period is selected compared to the situation where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. The generation display duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display continuation period may not be changed according to the start-pending storage number N and the support mode, and the above relation may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the display continuation period when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of a probable jackpot result, a normal jackpot result, a display continuation period table may be set individually for each of the case of out-reach and the case of full-out. In this case, the display continuation period is allocated according to each game result.

  After the display continuation period setting process is executed in step S408, a change command and a type command are set in step S409. The change command includes information on the display duration. Here, as described above, the display continuation period that can be acquired with reference to the non-reach occurrence fluctuation display table is different from the display continuation period that can be acquired with reference to the reach generation display continuation period table. Even if the command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred, the sub-side control device can identify whether or not reach has occurred from the information on the display duration. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred. The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes information on the probability variation jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the miss result, and the like as game result information.

  The variation command and type command set in step S409 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The sound lamp control device 90 determines the light emission pattern of the display lamp unit 54 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 55 in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and the contents of the determined effect The display lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55 are controlled so as to be executed. The audio lamp control device 90 transmits the change command and the type command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 determines a variation display pattern in the symbol display device 31 in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and the symbol display device 31 is executed so that the variation display pattern is executed. Control display. Specific contents of the display control will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S409, the main display unit 33 starts to display the variation of the pattern in step S410. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 9), when the main display unit 33 is in a variable display, the game times progress process of steps S306 to S308 is executed.

  In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the current game times display continuation period has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the display continuation period information stored in the display continuation period counter area of the RAM 64 is “0”. The value of the display continuation period information is set in the display continuation period setting process (step S408) as described above. Further, the value of the set display continuation period information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) is started.

  If the display continuation period has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S307. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 33 is changed. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the display continuation period has elapsed, a change end process is executed in step S308. In the change end process, the information stored in the RAM 64 in the process in any of the above steps S405 to S407 is specified, and the main display unit 33 displays the pattern form corresponding to the information on the main display unit 33. The display of the unit 33 is controlled. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, the confirmation command is transmitted to the sub-side control device such as the voice lamp control device 90 and the display control device 100 when the change end process is executed or when it is executed. Then, the confirmation command is not transmitted. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the command information indicating that the game game end timing is reached is not transmitted from the main controller 60.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S204 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 33 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S503 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, start processing of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S504. In the start process, an opening standby time for waiting without starting the opening of the big winning opening 22a of the variable winning device 22 is set for the opening in the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the following step S505, “15” is set in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the special winning opening 22a is opened.

  Then, after setting an opening command in step S506, the gaming state transition process is terminated. The opening command set in step S506 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 8).

  The sound lamp control device 90 starts the opening effect in the display lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55 based on the opening command. In addition, the sound lamp control device 90 transmits the opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. In the display control device 100, the opening effect is started in the symbol display device 31 based on the opening command.

  On the other hand, when it is in the opening / closing execution mode (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. When the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, a big winning opening / closing process is executed in step S508.

  In the big prize opening / closing process, when the big prize opening 22a is closed, the variable prize driving unit 22c is set in the driving state on condition that the round counter area RC is “1” or more. The mouth 22a is opened. In addition, when the big prize opening 22a is being opened, the variable prize driving is performed on condition that a predetermined time has passed since the opening of the big prize opening 22a or a predetermined number of game balls have been won. The driving state of the portion 22c is stopped, and the special winning opening 22a is closed.

  In the special winning opening / closing process, when the special winning opening 22a is opened, an opening command is transmitted to the sub-side control device. The sound lamp control device 90 starts each round effect in the display lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55 based on the release command. Further, the sound lamp control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. In the display control device 100, each round effect is started in the symbol display device 31 based on the release command.

  In the special winning opening / closing process, the ending command is transmitted to the control device on the sub side based on the fact that the round counter area RC has become “0” after the subtraction of the round counter area RC, and the waiting time for the ending is set. Set up. The sound lamp control device 90 starts the ending effect in the display lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55 based on the ending command. Further, the audio lamp control device 90 transmits the ending command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. In the display control device 100, an ending effect is started in the symbol display device 31 based on the ending command.

  After executing the big prize opening / closing process, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0” in step S509 and whether or not the waiting time for ending has elapsed in step S510. To do. If the value of the round counter area RC is not “0” or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter area RC is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S511.

  In the migration process, it is determined whether the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64. When the probability variation jackpot flag is stored, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. When the normal jackpot flag is stored, the success / failure lottery mode is set. The mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

  Incidentally, when the normal jackpot flag is stored, “100” which is the end reference number is set in the game number counter in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. This game number counter is decremented by 1 every time the above-described variation start process is executed, and when the value of the game number counter becomes “0”, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, in step S512, after the completion processing of the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the gaming state transition processing is ended. In the opening / closing execution mode end process, if either the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored, it is erased, and if not already stored, the state is maintained.

<Various Processes Executed by Display Control Device 100>
Next, display control processing executed when an image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 by the MPU 102 (hereinafter referred to as the display-side MPU 102) in the display control device 100 will be described. The display control process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  Here, the display-side MPU 102 starts the change display of the symbols for one game based on the reception of the change command transmitted from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 and relayed by the sound lamp control device 90. In this case, the contents of the fluctuation command are changed during the transmission due to the influence of electrical noise, etc., and depending on the degree of the change, it can be recognized that the command is a fluctuation command. A situation may occur in which the display duration included in the command for use cannot be specified. Hereinafter, the case where the display continuation period is normally specified will be described first, and then the case where the display continuation period is not normally specified will be described.

<When the display duration is normally specified from the command for change>
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the display control process.

  In step S601, it is determined whether a change command is received. If a change command has been received, change start processing is executed in step S602. In the variation starting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 13, first, in step S701, the display-side time table provided in the display-side time table storage area 111 of the program ROM 103 is referred to.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 14A, the display-side time table sets different display duration information in a one-to-one correspondence with the change commands transmitted from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. Has been. In this case, the change command is set as predetermined byte information, specifically, 1 byte information, and the higher-order bits (7th to 4th bits) itself are change commands. 14 (information “C” in FIG. 14A) is included, and information on the display continuation period (in FIG. 14A) is displayed in the lower bits (bits 3 to 0). , “A”, “B”, “C”, “X” and the like).

  The display-side MPU 102 determines whether or not the received command is a change command based on information included in the higher-order bits (step S601). If the command is a change command, the lower-order bits are used. The display duration information is read from the display-side time table based on the information included in. In the pachinko machine 10, the display duration set in the display-side time table is the same as the display duration set when the main display unit 33 is variably displayed in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display continuation period set in the display side time table is set in the display side MPU 102 after the display continuation period is set in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60. It may be set as a period subtracted from the display continuation period set in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 by the delay time until it is set.

  Note that the change command is not limited to the above-described configuration. If the change command includes information that is a change command and information that specifies the display duration, a specific information capacity or The information form is arbitrary. For example, the change command is composed of multiple bytes, such as 2 bytes, and the information that the change command is set in one byte is set, and the display duration information is set in the other bytes. It is good also as the structure currently made.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 13), after referring to the display-side time table in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether or not the information of the corresponding display duration exists. That is, it is determined whether or not the information for specifying the display duration included in the variation command received this time corresponds to any of the information stored in advance in the program ROM 103 as the display-side time table. . Since this is a process when the display continuation period is normally specified, an affirmative determination is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S703.

  In step S703, the information of the display continuation period specified this time is set in the game time counter area 121a provided as the game time measuring means in the various counter areas 121 of the work RAM 104. The game turn counter area 121a is set as a predetermined byte, specifically, as a 2-byte area as shown in FIG. 14 (b-1), and the information of the display duration read from the display-side time table is displayed. Set. In this case, the information of the display continuation period is newly set instead of being added to the information already stored in the game times counter area 121a.

  The information set in the game times counter area 121a is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the display control process is activated. As already described, since the display control process is started at a cycle of 2 msec, the value set in the game times counter area 121a is updated so that 1 is subtracted at a cycle of 2 msec.

  By the way, when all the bits of the game counter area 121a are set to “1”, the display continuation period exceeds 2 minutes, but the display continuation period stored in advance in the display side time table The longest time is 90.5 sec. That is, the game capacity counter area 121a has a storage capacity set so that information of a display continuation period longer than a preset longest display continuation period can be set.

  In step S703, after the display duration information is set in the game times counter area 121a, in step S704, the type command received together with the current variation command is read out, and the jackpot result is obtained from the command. Whether or not the jackpot result information is included is grasped, and the type of the jackpot result is grasped. The type command is set as 1-byte information like the change command, and includes information indicating that it is a type command and game result information.

  In step S704, the presence / absence of reach is determined from the display duration information determined from the change command. In this pachinko machine 10, as described above, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 determines whether or not reach has occurred, and the MPU 62 has different display continuation periods depending on whether or not reach has occurred. select. Therefore, the display-side MPU 102 can grasp whether or not reach has occurred based on the display duration information obtained from the change command.

  In the subsequent step S705, a stop result setting process is executed. In the stop result setting process, stop result information corresponding to the game result information grasped in step S704 is set. When setting the information of the stop result, a symbol update counter area and a symbol information acquisition area provided in the work RAM 104 are used. Specifically, a counter area corresponding to each symbol row is provided in the symbol updating counter area, and these counter areas correspond to the number of symbols set in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The counter value is set. The counter value indicates a symbol on a predetermined effective line (for example, effective line L1) among the plurality of effective lines L1 to L5. In addition, the counter values of the counter areas for each symbol row are updated at different periods. Then, all information updated in the counter area for each symbol row is acquired at a predetermined cycle, and the acquired information is stored in the symbol information acquisition area.

  In the symbol information acquisition area, a probability variation jackpot area, a normal jackpot area, a miss reach area, and a perfect miss area are set. If the information acquired from all of the counter areas for each symbol row is information in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is stopped on any active line, the information is the probability variation jackpot. If the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is stopped and displayed on any active line, the information is usually stored in the jackpot area, not any of the above information In addition, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the outlier reach result is information to be stopped and displayed on any active line, the information is stored in the outlier reach area, and if it is not any of the above information, the information is completely off. Stored in the service area. In step S705, outage information is read from the area corresponding to the game result information grasped in step S704 among the areas of the symbol information acquisition area.

  In a succeeding step S706, a setting process of a game turning effect mode is executed. In the setting process of the game mode effect mode, referring to the game mode effect mode table provided in the program ROM 103, information on the display duration set in step S703 and information on the stop result acquired in step S705 The mode information of the effect for game times corresponding to both is specified. Specifically, in the game mode effect mode table, game mode effect mode information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of information on each display duration and information on each stop result. In addition, address information is set in correspondence with the mode information of each game turning effect. The aspect information of each game turn effect is stored in advance in the aspect information storage area 112b provided as aspect information storage means in the program ROM 103, and the address information is the aspect information determined this time in the aspect information storage area 112b. Is information for specifying the address of the area in which is stored. In step S706, address information corresponding to the combination of the display duration information and the stop result information already specified in the game turn effect mode table is specified, and the specified address information is provided in the work RAM 104. Stored in the mode information storage area 122.

  When the address information is stored in the mode information storage area 122, the display-side MPU 102 issues a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 in accordance with the mode information of the game turning effect corresponding to the address information. In this case, the aspect information of the game turning effect includes information on a drawing instruction timing for performing moving image display, and further includes information on a drawing list as information on a drawing instruction content at each drawing instruction timing. Yes. The display-side MPU 102 refers to the elapsed time of the game times measured in the game turn counter area 121a and the game turn effect mode information corresponding to the address information stored in the mode information storage area 122. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a drawing instruction timing, and if it is the drawing instruction timing, information of a drawing list corresponding to the timing is output to the VDP 105 as an internal command.

  Here, at least at the game times that result in complete losing or normal reach display, the symbol variation display of all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is started in the high-speed variation display that is a low discrimination mode, and then the predetermined variation The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are switched to the low-speed fluctuation display which is a high identification mode in the order, and the symbols are displayed on standby in the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the predetermined order. Then, after the symbols are displayed in a swing display period in a state where the symbols are displayed on standby in each of the standby areas of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols are displayed stationary as a final stop display. (Confirmed display or fixed display) and the still display state is continued over the still display period.

  Incidentally, the swing display, which is a kind of standby display, means that the symbols waiting in the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 are swung in the same waiting areas SA1 to SA9, and each symbol is in a corresponding standby state. Within the areas SA1 to SA9, the symbol swings within a range including the stop position, and each symbol swings within a range sandwiching the corresponding stop position.

  On the other hand, in the game times in which the super reach display is performed, the change display of the symbols is started, and the symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, which are a part of the symbol rows, are in the standby areas SA1 to SA3, SA7 to SA9. And a reach line is formed, and then a super reach image is displayed. Thereafter, in a state in which the combination of jackpot symbols or the combination of outreach symbols is formed, the symbols that are displayed on standby in the respective standby areas on all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a swinging manner over the swing display period. Then, these symbols are displayed stationary, and the stationary display state is continued over the stationary display period.

  The game turn effect mode information includes information on the drawing instruction timing from the start timing of the symbol variation display to the completion of the static display period, and information on the drawing list at each drawing instruction timing. In other words, the game turn effect mode information includes information on timing to switch from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, information on timing to display symbols on standby in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and a state of waiting It can be said that the information on the timing for switching from the state in which the symbol is oscillated to the stationary display and the information on the timing for terminating the stationary display are included.

  In step S706, the address information is stored in the aspect information storage area 122, so that the first drawing list information set in the aspect information of the game turning effect corresponding to the address information is provided in the program ROM 103. Read from the drawing list information storage area 113 and output to the VDP 105. As a result, the VDP 105 causes an image corresponding to the information of the drawing list to be drawn on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, whereby the symbol display device 31 starts the symbol variation display in the current game round.

  In the subsequent step S707, when the mismatch flag (mismatch information) is stored in the mismatch flag storage area 123 provided as the mismatch information storage means in the work RAM 104, the mismatch flag is erased. The mismatch flag is a flag stored when the display continuation period is not normally specified from the change command. Thereafter, the variation starting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the display control process (FIG. 12), when a negative determination is made in step S601 or after the process of step S602 is executed, it is determined whether or not one game is being executed in step S603. To do. If one game time is being executed, the changing processing is executed in step S604.

  In the changing process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15, the elapsed time of the game times measured in the game time counter area 121a and the address information stored in the mode information storage area 122 in step S801. It is determined whether or not it is the drawing instruction timing by referring to the mode information corresponding to. If it is not the drawing instruction timing, the mid-variation process is terminated as it is.

  If it is the drawing instruction timing, it is determined in step S802 whether it is after the final stop timing. If it is not after the final stop timing, it is determined in step S803 whether or not a mismatch flag is stored in the work RAM 104. In this case, since the process is performed when the display continuation period is normally specified from the change command, the mismatch flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S803, and the process proceeds to step S804.

  In step S804, it is determined whether or not the current drawing instruction timing is after the standby timing at which symbols are displayed on standby in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. If it is not after the standby timing, a drawing instruction process for standby is executed in step S805. Thus, the drawing list information corresponding to the rendering mode before the standby display is performed, and the drawing list information corresponding to the current drawing instruction timing is read from the drawing list information storage area 113 and output to the VDP 105. To do. When the drawing list information is output in the instruction process, for example, the symbols are scroll-displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a situation where the background screen is displayed so as to change.

  On the other hand, if it is after the standby timing, a drawing instruction process for swing display is executed in step S806. Thus, the drawing list information corresponding to the swing display and corresponding to the current drawing instruction timing is read from the drawing list information storage area 113 and output to the VDP 105. When the information of the drawing list is output in the instruction process, for example, in a situation where the background screen is displayed so as to change, the symbols waiting on the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are swung in a predetermined direction. Is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S802 that it is after the final stop timing, still display drawing instruction processing is executed in step S807. As a result, the drawing list information corresponding to the static display and corresponding to the current drawing instruction timing is read from the drawing list information storage area 113 and output to the VDP 105. When the information of the drawing list is output in the instruction process, for example, in the situation where the background screen is displayed so as to change, the symbols waiting on each of the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 are displayed as being stationary. The

  After executing the process of step S805, step S806, or step S807, in step S808, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the game round, that is, whether or not the information in the game round counter area 121a is the initial value. To do. If it is not the end time of the game round, the mid-variation process is terminated as it is. If it is the end timing of the game times, in step S809, the non-matching flag is deleted, and then the mid-variation processing is ended.

  Returning to the description of the display control process (FIG. 12), if a negative determination is made in step S603, or after the process of step S604 is executed, it is determined in step S605 whether an opening command has been received. If the opening command has not been received, the process proceeds directly to step S609. If an opening command has been received, it is determined in step S606 whether or not a mismatch flag is stored in the work RAM 104. In this case, since the processing is performed when the display continuation period is normally specified from the change command, the mismatch flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S606, and the process proceeds to step S607.

  In step S607, a normal opening setting process is executed. In the setting process, information on the duration of the opening effect is read from the program ROM 103 and set in the opening / closing execution counter area provided in the various counter areas 121 of the work RAM 104. The information set in the opening / closing execution counter area is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the display control process is activated. Further, in the setting process, the opening / closing execution mode provided in the work RAM 104 includes the drawing instruction timing for the opening effect and the address information of the aspect information for the opening effect in which the information of the drawing list corresponding to each drawing instruction timing is set. The data is stored in the storage area 124. The aspect information is also stored in the aspect information storage area 112 of the program ROM 103.

  The display side MPU 102 refers to the elapsed time of the opening effect measured in the opening / closing execution counter area and the drawing instruction timing by referring to the mode information corresponding to the address information stored in the opening / closing execution mode storage area 124. When the drawing instruction timing is reached, the drawing list information corresponding to the timing is output to the VDP 105 as an internal command. As a result, an opening effect image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. Note that the determination as to whether or not it is the drawing instruction timing for the opening effect is performed in other processing in step S611 described later. After executing the process of step S607, the process proceeds to step S609.

  In step S609, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the demo image. The demo image is a symbol display device 31 when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) has elapsed after the stationary display period has elapsed since the stop result of the previous game times was displayed. The image of the start waiting effect displayed on the display screen G. Incidentally, in the demo image, an image in which the symbols displayed in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 perform a predetermined operation is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbol performs a predetermined operation. It may be configured such that a maker name, a model name, or a moving image with a predetermined character is displayed after or instead of the displayed image.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed after the stationary display period has elapsed by displaying the previous game stop result. When determining whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed, a start waiting effect counter area provided in the various counter areas 121 of the work RAM 104 is used, and the counter area has a timing at which the stationary display period has elapsed. Information on the start waiting period is set and updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the display control process is started.

  Here, the start waiting period is the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 regarding the already stored hold information after the end of one game time in the situation where the hold information is stored in the main control device 60. Then, the fluctuation start process (FIG. 10) is executed, the fluctuation command is transmitted, and the time required for the execution of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 13) in the display-side MPU 102 for the fluctuation command is completed. It is set as a period. As a result, when one game round is completed in a situation where the hold information is stored in the main control device 60, the display of the demo image is started immediately before the game turn related to the hold information is started. It is prevented.

  If it is the start timing of the demo image, the demo image processing is executed in step S610. In the demo image processing, the demo image duration information is set in the start waiting effect counter area, and the demo image drawing instruction timing and the drawing list information corresponding to each drawing instruction timing are set. The address information of the mode information for images is stored in the demo image mode storage area 125 provided in the work RAM 104. The aspect information is also stored in the aspect information storage area 112 of the program ROM 103.

  The display-side MPU 102 refers to the elapsed time of the demo image measured in the start waiting effect counter area and the mode information corresponding to the address information stored in the demo image mode storage area 125, thereby drawing instructions. It is determined whether or not it is a timing, and if it is a drawing instruction timing, information of a drawing list corresponding to the timing is output to the VDP 105 as an internal command. As a result, the demo image is displayed as a moving image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. Note that the determination as to whether or not it is the drawing instruction timing for the demo image is performed in other processing in step S611 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S609 or after the processing in step S610 is executed, other processing is executed in step S611. In the other processing, as already described, it is determined whether or not it is the drawing instruction timing for the opening effect or the drawing instruction timing for the demo image. Information on the drawing list corresponding to the instruction timing is output to the VDP 105.

  In other processes, it is determined whether or not an open command or an ending command is received. If any command is received, the time information corresponding to the command is set, and the address of the mode information A process for storing information is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a drawing instruction timing for each round effect and ending effect, and when it is the drawing instruction timing, information of a drawing list corresponding to the drawing instruction timing is output to the VDP 105. After executing other processing, the display control processing is terminated.

<Display control when the display duration is normally specified from the command for variation>
Here, the state of display control when the display continuation period is normally specified from the change command will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 16A shows the command reception status in the display side MPU 102, FIG. 16B shows the variable display status in the main display section 33, and FIG. 16C shows the game times execution period in the display side MPU 102. 16 (d) shows the state of the variable display of the symbol in the upper symbol row Z1, FIG. 16 (e) shows the state of the variable display of the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2, and FIG. 16 (f) shows the lower symbol. FIG. 16 (g) shows the state of fluctuation display of symbols in the column Z3, FIG. 16 (g) shows the swing display period in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, FIG. 16 (h) shows the static display period, and FIG. Indicates the demo image period.

  By receiving the change command at the timing of t1, the display side MPU 102 enters the game times execution period, the change display of the symbols is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, and the symbols are displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. High-speed fluctuation is displayed. In addition, at the timing of t1, the variable display is also started on the main display unit 33. At the timing t1, the type command is received together with the variation command.

  Thereafter, the scroll display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display at the timing t2, and the symbols are displayed in the standby areas SA1 to SA3 in the upper symbol row Z1 at the timing t3. The In this case, the swing display is started for the symbols displayed on standby in the respective standby areas SA1 to SA3 of the upper symbol row Z1. Further, at the timing of t3, the scroll display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the symbols are displayed on standby in the respective standby areas SA7 to SA9 of the lower symbol row Z3. In this case, the swing display is started in the symbols displayed on standby in the respective standby areas SA7 to SA9 of the lower symbol row Z3. Further, at the timing of t4, the scroll display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the symbols are displayed on standby in the respective standby areas SA4 to SA6 of the middle symbol row Z2. In this case, the swing display is started for symbols that are displayed on standby in each of the standby areas SA4 to SA6 of the middle symbol row Z2. Here, at the timing of t5, the symbols already displayed in the standby areas SA1 to SA3 in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbols that are in standby display in the standby areas SA7 to SA9 in the lower symbol row Z3 are already displayed in a swinging manner. Has been started. That is, the timing of t5 corresponds to the standby timing at which symbols are displayed on standby in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the swing display is started.

  Thereafter, when the swing display period elapses at the timing of t6, the symbols that are displayed on standby in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are displayed stationary. Thereafter, when the still display period (for example, 0.5 sec) elapses at the timing of t7, the present game time execution period is terminated in the display-side MPU 102. In this case, the variable display is also ended on the main display unit 33. Note that the static display period is arbitrary.

  After that, at the timing of t8, the display of the demo image is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 when the demo display period elapses from the end of the game times execution period without receiving a new command. The

  That is, in this pachinko machine 10, when the change command is received in the display side MPU 102 and the change display of the symbols is started in the symbol display device 31, the display of the symbols in the game round is completed. The effect mode is determined in the display-side MPU 102, and the game times effect in the symbol display device 31 is completed without requiring the transmission of the confirmation command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. As a result, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 does not need to send a confirmation command, and the number of commands that should be prepared in advance in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the confirmation command is transmitted.

  Also, in the case where the display-side MPU 102 continues to execute the effect of one game time until the confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is received, the display is confirmed due to the influence of electrical noise during transmission. If the contents of the command are rewritten, there is a concern that the execution state of the effect of one game time may be continued in the display-side MPU 102 while the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 has already completed one game time. The On the other hand, since the end of the effect of one game is uniquely determined by the display side MPU 102, the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above can be suppressed.

<When the display duration is not correctly specified from the command for change>
Next, a case where the display continuation period is not normally specified from the change command will be described.

  In step S601 of the display control process (FIG. 12), as described above, it is determined whether or not a variation command is received. If a variation command is received, the variation start is performed in step S602. Execute the process. In the variation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 13, the display-side time table is referred to in step S701, and in step S702, it is determined whether or not the corresponding display duration information exists. Since this is a process for the case where the display continuation period is not normally specified, a negative determination is made in step S702, and the process proceeds to step S708.

  In step S708, as shown in FIG. 14 (b-2), “1” is set for all the bits in the game times counter area 121a. That is, in this pachinko machine 10, the information on the inconsistency period is stored on the processing program in the program ROM 103, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the information on the inconsistency period is stored as numerical information in the program ROM 103. The process of setting it in the game times counter area 121a may be executed.

  Here, as already explained, the display continuation period when all the bits of the game times counter area 121a are set to “1” is the maximum display continuation period stored in advance in the display side time table. It is over. That is, the information on the inconsistency period is set as information longer than the longest display continuation period when the display continuation period is normally specified from the variation command.

  Furthermore, while the discrepancy period exceeds 2 minutes, the longest display continuation period when the display continuation period is normally specified from the command for fluctuation is 90.5 seconds. In the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the data setting process (step S304) and the change start process (step S305) are executed in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, the change command is transmitted, and the display side MPU 102 changes the change. This is longer than the time required for completion of the variation start process for the command.

  In the subsequent step S709, information on the non-matching stop result is read from the non-matching stop result storage area 114 provided in the program ROM 103 as a non-matching stop result storage unit. Here, the information about the disagreement stop result is such that the combination of jackpot symbols is not stopped on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination of reach symbols is not stopped on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Is set. The pachinko machine 10 is set so that a combination of symbols for mismatching that does not constitute both a jackpot symbol combination and a reach symbol combination is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. Arbitrary symbols may be stopped and displayed on the condition that the combination of jackpot symbols is not stopped and displayed on the lines L1 to L5, and the reach symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. .

  Thereafter, in step S710, a setting process for a mismatch mode is executed. In the mismatch mode setting processing, the address information of the mismatch mode information stored in the mismatch mode information storage area 115 provided as the mismatch mode information storage means in the program ROM 103 is used as the mode information storage area 122 of the work RAM 104. Remember me. As a result, the display-side MPU 102 issues a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 in accordance with the mismatch mode information corresponding to the address information. In this case, the disagreement mode information includes drawing instruction timing information for displaying a moving image, and further includes drawing list information as drawing instruction content information at each drawing instruction timing. The display-side MPU 102 draws by referring to the elapsed time of the game times measured in the game time counter area 121a and the inconsistency mode information corresponding to the address information stored in the mode information storage area 122. It is determined whether or not it is the instruction timing, and when it is the drawing instruction timing, information on the drawing list corresponding to the timing is output to the VDP 105 as an internal command.

  Here, in the disagreement aspect information, when the display continuation period is normally specified from the variation command, the rendering aspect that is executed at the beginning of the variation, specifically, the symbols of all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 by the high-speed variation display The display mode is set so that the scroll display is started from the start timing of the game times and the high-speed fluctuation display is continued over the period excluding the stationary display period from the end timing of the game times. When the stationary display timing is reached, the disagreement stop result is statically displayed and the static display state is set to continue for the static display period.

  In other words, the non-coincidence mode information includes the initial variation effect mode in the game times when the display continuation period is normally specified over the initial variation period that occupies most of the mismatch period. When the variation period has elapsed, the variation display of all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 is stopped in a state where the disagreement stop result is displayed, and further, the state is determined when the display duration is normally specified. The production mode is set so as to continue over the still display period. In this case, the initial variation period is set as information longer than the longest display continuation period when the display continuation period is normally specified from the variation command.

  Furthermore, the initial variation period is a time obtained by subtracting the longest display continuation period when the display continuation period is normally specified from the variation command from the initial variation period, in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60. The data setting process (step S304) and the fluctuation start process (step S305) are executed for the pending information, the fluctuation command is transmitted, and the display side MPU 102 completes the fluctuation start process for the fluctuation command. It is set to be longer than the time.

  In step S710, the address information is stored in the mode information storage area 122, so that the information of the first drawing list set as the mismatching mode information is read from the drawing list information storage area 113 of the program ROM 103 and stored in the VDP 105. Output. As a result, the VDP 105 draws an image corresponding to the information on the drawing list on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, so that the game display effect of the mismatch mode is started on the symbol display device 31.

  In the subsequent step S711, the mismatch flag is stored in the mismatch flag storage area 123 of the work RAM 104. Thereafter, the variation starting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the display control process (FIG. 12), if a negative determination is made in step S601 or after the process of step S602 is executed, one game is being executed in step S603 as already described. It is determined whether or not one game is being executed, and in-variation processing is executed in step S604.

  In the process for changing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15, it is determined in step S801 whether or not it is a drawing instruction timing. If it is not the drawing instruction timing, the mid-variation processing is terminated as it is, and if it is the drawing instruction timing, it is determined in step S802 whether it is after the final stop timing. If it is not after the final stop timing, it is determined in step S803 whether or not a mismatch flag is stored in the work RAM 104. This time, since the processing is performed when the display continuation period is not normally specified from the change command, a mismatch flag is stored. Accordingly, an affirmative determination is made in step S803, and the drawing instruction process for waiting in step S805 is executed without executing the process in step S804.

  As already explained, when a game-time effect is executed in a non-coincidence mode, the initial variation effect mode is continued for most of the non-coincidence period, and at the end of the game, the non-coincidence mode is used in all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3. It is displayed statically with the stop result displayed. Therefore, when the game times effect is executed in the non-matching mode, the swing display is not performed in a state where the standby display is performed, and accordingly, the process of step S804 and the process of step S806 are performed. It is not executed.

  In the drawing instruction process for waiting in step S805, the drawing list information corresponding to the rendering mode in which the symbols of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scroll-displayed in the initial variation, that is, the high-speed variation display, The drawing list information corresponding to the instruction timing is read from the drawing list information storage area 113 and output to the VDP 105. Thereby, in the symbol display device 31, the initial fluctuation proceeds over the initial fluctuation period.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is after the final stop timing (step S802: YES), a drawing instruction process for still display is executed in step S807. In the drawing instruction process, the drawing list information corresponding to the static display and corresponding to the current drawing instruction timing is read from the drawing list information storage area 113 and output to the VDP 105. As a result, the non-matching stop result is statically displayed in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 and is continued for the static display period.

  After executing the process of step S805 or step S807, as already described, it is determined in step S808 whether or not it is the end timing of the game round. If it is time to end the process and the game times, in step S809, the non-coincidence flag is deleted, and then the mid-variation process ends.

  Returning to the description of the display control process (FIG. 12), if a negative determination is made in step S603 or after the process of step S604 has been executed, an opening command has been received in step S605 as already described. If the opening command has not been received, the process proceeds directly to step S609. On the other hand, if the opening command has been received, it is determined in step S606 whether a mismatch flag is stored. judge. This time, since the processing is performed when the display continuation period is not normally specified from the change command, a mismatch flag is stored. Accordingly, in step S608, a mismatching opening setting process is executed.

  In the mismatching opening setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, first, in step S901, an opening time grasping process is executed. Specifically, information on the duration of the opening effect is read from the program ROM 103 and stored in the register of the display side MPU 102. In the subsequent step S902, information on the static display period is read from the program ROM 103 and set in the game turn counter area 121a of the work RAM 104. In this case, it is not added to the information already stored in the game times counter area 121a, but the information of the still display period is newly set.

  In a succeeding step S903, a setting process for a mismatching still mode is executed. In the setting process, the address information of the inconsistent still mode information stored in the still mode information storage area 116 provided as the inconsistent still mode information storage means in the program ROM 103 is stored in the mode information storage area 122 of the work RAM 104. Let The disagreement still state information includes information for causing the disagreement stop result to be displayed statically over the still display period. Specifically, the drawing instruction timing information for performing the display and each drawing are displayed. The drawing list information at the instruction timing is set.

  In the subsequent step S904, opening time information setting processing is executed. Specifically, information on the time obtained by subtracting the stationary display period set in the game turn counter area 121a in step S902 from the opening time grasped in step S901 is displayed in the opening / closing execution counter area of the work RAM 104. set. In a succeeding step S905, an opening effect mode information setting process is executed. In this case, the address information of the mode information for the opening effect and shortened by the amount of the static mode for mismatching is stored in the opening / closing execution mode storage area 124 of the work RAM 104. The aspect information for the opening effect is as described above.

  Here, as already explained, when the display continuation period is not normally specified from the variation command, the information on the mismatch period is set. However, the mismatch period is displayed from the variation command. The information is set as information longer than the longest display continuation period when the continuation period is normally specified. Then, for the game time variation command that is the jackpot result, if the display continuation period is not normally specified from the variation command, the game display effect is executed in the non-coincidence mode on the symbol display device 31. In such a situation, the display-side MPU 102 receives the opening command.

  Under the circumstances as described above, the time information is stored in both the game times counter area 121a and the opening / closing execution counter area after the opening command is received by executing the processing of step S901 to step S905. It becomes a state. In this case, the display-side MPU 102 prioritizes the subtraction processing of the game times counter area 121a every time the display control processing is started, and after the game times counter area 121a becomes the initial value for the opening / closing execution counter area. Perform subtraction processing. Further, in other processes in step S611, until the game times counter area 121a reaches the initial value, information on the drawing list corresponding to the image displaying the stop result for inconsistency is output at each drawing instruction timing. After the game turn counter area 121a has reached the initial value, the drawing list information corresponding to the opening effect image is output every time the drawing instruction timing comes.

  In the inconsistency opening setting process (FIG. 17), after executing the process of step S905, the inconsistency flag is erased from the work RAM 104 in step S906. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of the display control process (FIG. 12), after the mismatch setting opening process is executed in step S608, the processes in and after step S609 are executed. The processing after step S609 is as already described.

<Display control when the display duration is not properly specified from the command for variation>
Here, the state of display control when the display continuation period is not normally specified from the change command will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  18A shows the command reception status in the display side MPU 102, FIG. 18B shows the fluctuation display status in the main display section 33, FIG. 18C shows the execution status in the open / close execution mode, FIG. 18D shows a period in which high-speed fluctuation display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and FIG. 18E shows a period in which normal fluctuation display that is not a mismatching mode is performed in the symbol display device 31. FIG. 18 (f) shows the still display period, and FIG. 18 (g) shows the execution state of the opening effect.

  First, no hold information is stored other than the game round start target, the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot result, and the normal display continuation period from the change command related to the hold information A case will be described in which no new hold information is acquired until the production of the non-coincidence mode of the game times ends.

  By receiving the change command at the timing t1, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process for starting game times. However, the display continuation period cannot be specified normally from the current variation command, and the non-matching period is set as the display continuation period, and the symbol scroll display by the high-speed variation display in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Is started. In addition, at the timing of t1, the variable display is also started on the main display unit 33. Although the type command is received together with the variation command at the timing t1, the type command is not referred to in the display-side MPU 102 because the game times of this time are rendered in the non-matching mode.

  After that, at the timing of t2, the variable display is ended on the main display unit 33. However, as already described, the mismatch period is set as information longer than the longest display continuation period when the display continuation period is normally specified from the variation command. The symbol variation display is not terminated at the timing t2, and the state in which the symbol scroll display by the high-speed variation display is executed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the high-speed fluctuation display is terminated in a state where the disagreement stop result as shown in FIG. 18A is displayed, and the symbols are statically displayed in each standby area. Thereafter, when the still display period elapses at timing t4, the state in which the still display is continued is released. Note that the mismatch flag stored in the work RAM 104 at the timing of t1 is deleted by executing the process of step S809 at the timing of t4.

  Next, a plurality of hold information is stored, and the hold information that is the start target of the game times first does not correspond to the jackpot result, and further relates to the hold information that is the start target of the game times earlier A case where the display continuation period cannot be normally specified from the change command will be described.

  By receiving the change command at the timing of t5, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process for starting game times. However, the display continuation period cannot be normally specified from the change command of this time, the non-matching period is set as the display continuation period, and the high-speed change display of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The In addition, at the timing of t5, the variable display is started on the main display unit 33. Note that at the timing of t5, the type command is received together with the variation command. However, since the game times of this time are produced in the non-matching mode, the type command is not referred to on the display side MPU 102.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the variable display is terminated on the main display unit 33. However, since the effect is executed in the non-coincidence mode in the symbol display device 31, the symbol variation display in the symbol display device 31 is not terminated at the timing of t6, and the symbols by the high-speed variation display in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The state where the scroll display is executed is continued.

  Thereafter, in the situation where the effect in the non-coincidence mode is continued on the symbol display device 31, the command for variation related to the next hold information is received at the timing of t7. In the display control process (FIG. 12), whether or not a variation command is received is determined regardless of whether or not one game is being executed, and when the variation command is received. The variation start process (FIG. 13) is executed for the newly received variation command. Therefore, even in the situation where the effect by the inconsistency mode for the variation command received last time is being executed in the symbol display device 31, the display side MPU 102 executes the variation start processing for the newly received variation command. Is done.

  Since the display continuation period can be normally specified from the variation command received this time, normal symbol variation display that is not a mismatch mode is started in the symbol display device 31 at the timing t7. In this case, in the disagreement aspect, the high-speed variation display in all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 is continued over the majority of the period, and even in the normal symbol variation display, all symbol sequences are initially displayed. High speed fluctuation display is performed in Z1 to Z3. Furthermore, in the display control process (FIG. 12), when a new command for variation is received during the execution of one game, a new process is performed without temporarily performing the process of temporarily stopping the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 31. The variation start process is executed for the variation command received at the same time, and the display shifts to the symbol variation display corresponding to the processing result. Therefore, in the symbol display device 31, the state in which the high-speed fluctuation display is executed in all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 is continued before and after the timing of t7. For the player, just by checking the symbol display device 31. It is not possible to recognize whether a new game round has been started.

  Here, in the effect of the non-coincidence mode, as already described, the entire symbol sequence Z1 is extended over a time longer than the longest display continuation period selected when the display continuation period is normally specified from the change command. The high-speed fluctuation display of symbols in .about.Z3 is continued. Further, as already described, in the case of the inconsistency mode, the initial variation period in which the high-speed variation display of the symbols is continued in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is when the display continuation period is normally specified from the variation command. The data setting process (step S304) and the change start process (step S305) are executed for the new hold information in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 by subtracting the longest display continuation period from the initial change period. It is set to be longer than the time until the change command is transmitted and the display side MPU 102 completes the change start process for the change command. Thereby, when the hold information is held and stored in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the situation where the effect for the inconsistency mode is being executed, the situation where the high-speed fluctuation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is being executed. Then, the execution of the new variation start process in the display-side MPU 102 is reliably completed, and the state where the high-speed variation display is performed in all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 is continued across a plurality of game times.

  At the timing t7, the type command is received together with the change command, and the information on the type command is also referred to during the change start process.

  After that, at the timing of t8, with respect to the normal symbol fluctuation display in the newly started game times, the symbols are displayed in at least some of the symbol rows from the situation where the symbols are fast-changing in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Slow fluctuation display is displayed. Thereafter, the symbols are displayed on standby in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are displayed in a swinging manner in that state. At the timing t9, the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are displayed. The symbols that are displayed on standby are displayed stationary. As shown in FIG. 18B, the stop result in this case is a stop result that is not selected as the mismatch stop result.

  Thereafter, when the still display period elapses at timing t10, the state in which the still display is continued is released. Note that the inconsistency flag stored in the work RAM 104 at the timing of t5 is deleted by executing the process of step S707 at the timing of t7.

  Next, a case will be described in which the hold information that is the starting target of the game times corresponds to the jackpot result, and the display continuation period cannot be normally specified from the change command related to the hold information.

  By receiving the change command at the timing of t11, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process for starting game times. However, the display continuation period cannot be normally specified from the change command of this time, the non-matching period is set as the display continuation period, and the high-speed change display of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The In addition, at the timing of t11, the variable display is started on the main display unit 33. Note that at the timing of t11, the type command is received together with the variation command. However, since the game times of this time are produced by the mismatch mode, the type command is not referred to on the display side MPU 102.

  Thereafter, in the situation where the effect in the non-coincidence mode is continued on the symbol display device 31, the current variation display on the main display unit 33 is terminated at the timing t12, and the display side MPU 102 receives the opening command. . Further, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 starts the opening / closing execution mode.

  In this case, the opening setting process (FIG. 17) for mismatching already described is executed, so that the opening effect is not immediately executed in the symbol display device 31, but mismatches as shown in FIG. 18C. The high-speed fluctuation display is terminated in a state where the stop result is displayed, and the symbols are displayed statically in each standby area. Thereafter, the opening display effect is started in the symbol display device 31 when the stationary display period elapses at the timing of t13.

  When the opening command is received in the situation where the effect for the inconsistency mode is being executed as described above, the opening effect is started after the disagreement stop result is displayed, thereby continuing to the effect for the inconsistency mode. Even if the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the player can easily recognize the boundary between the two. Further, the static display over the static display period of the disagreement stop result is performed by shortening the original opening effect by the static display period. As a result, the effect of the non-matching stop result being statically displayed is limited to the range of the opening effect, and the subsequent round effects are prevented from being affected.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Based on the information transmitted from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 (hereinafter also referred to as the main side MPU 62), the display side MPU 102 controls the display of the symbol display device 31 so that the symbol variation display is performed. The concentration of processing load on the MPU 62 is alleviated. In this case, the display-side MPU 102 determines a game-playing effect corresponding to the variation-command transmitted from the main-side MPU 62, and the game-playing effect is further displayed on the symbol display device 31. In the situation being executed at, the final stop display of the stop result is performed based on the determined game turn effect without requiring transmission of a confirmation command from the main MPU 62. As a result, the main MPU 62 does not need to transmit a confirmation command, and the number of commands transmitted from the main MPU 62 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which a confirmation command is transmitted. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the display side MPU 102 uniquely identifies the start timing of the standby display, the end timing of the standby display, and the start timing of the static display regardless of the command from the main MPU 62, and further starts the display of the demo image. The timing to be performed is uniquely specified irrespective of the command from the main MPU 62. Also from this point, the number of commands transmitted from the main side MPU 62 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the commands for specifying the respective timings are transmitted from the main side MPU 62, and the memory required in the main control device 60 can be reduced. The capacity can be suppressed.

  The various timings described above are included in the aspect of the game turn effect determined based on the reception of the variation command. As a result, the display-side MPU 102 can complete a series of game times effects by performing display control based on the aspect of the game times effects described above, and therefore display control for causing the game times effects to be performed. The processing load during the execution of is reduced.

  Even if the display-side MPU 102 cannot normally specify the display continuation period from the received variation command, the display-side MPU 102 starts the variation display of the symbols by the mismatch mode. Thereby, even if part of the information of the command for change is rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like in the middle of transmission, it is possible to perform an effect for game times. In this case, as already described, the end timing of the game turning effect can be uniquely specified on the display side MPU 102.

  The display continuation period in the case where the game-turning effect is performed in the non-coincidence mode is set as a time longer than the shortest display continuation period that can be selected when the display continuation period is normally specified from the change command. . Thereby, when the game turn effect by the mode for inconsistency is performed, it is suppressed that the display continuation period becomes extremely short. Assuming a configuration in which the display continuation period is extremely short, in a situation in which the hold information is held and stored in the main MPU 62, until the next game turn effect is started after the game turn effect in the disagreement mode is ended. There is a concern that this period will be longer than necessary. In this case, the player may feel that the next game round will not start despite the fact that the hold information is being held and stored in the first hold lamp section 35, and the game There is a concern that it may give a strange feeling to the person. On the other hand, the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above is suppressed by suppressing the display continuation period from becoming extremely short when the effect for playing the game in the non-coincidence mode is performed as described above. It can be suppressed.

  When a game-playing effect is performed in a non-coincidence mode, the display-side MPU 102 only needs to set “1” to all bits in the game-turn counter area 121a for setting the display duration period. Simplification of processing relating to setting of the rendition effect is achieved.

  When a new variation command is received while a game-playing effect in the non-coincidence mode is being performed, the display-side MPU 102 stops the game-turning effect in the non-coincidence mode and newly receives the variation-use command. A game-playing effect for the command is started. This prevents the game MP effect from being continued in the non-matching mode even though the main MPU 62 is about to start a new game game.

  In addition, when a game-turn effect is performed according to the non-matching mode, “1” is set to all the bits of the game-turn counter area 121a as described above. This corresponds to the upper limit display duration that can be set in the game times counter area 121a, and is a longer time than the longest display duration when the display duration is normally selected from the change command. On the other hand, since the main MPU 62 independently measures the display continuation period of each game time, the hold information is stored in the main MPU 62 in a situation where a game turn effect is performed in a non-matching mode. In the case where there is a game-turning effect in the non-matching mode, a variation command is transmitted from the main MPU 62. In this case, even if a situation in which the display continuation period cannot be normally specified from the change command suddenly occurs by giving priority to the start of the new game turning effect as described above, the occurrence of the situation will occur. Thus, it is possible to suppress a great influence on the game-playing effect relating to the changing command transmitted thereafter.

  When a game-playing effect is performed in a non-coincidence mode, regardless of whether the type command received when determining the mode of the game-playing effect can be normally decoded, A stop result that is not stopped on the active line is displayed as a final stop. When the information of the command for change is rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like during transmission, the information of the type command transmitted at the same time may be rewritten. In such a situation, when a game turning effect is performed in a non-coincidence mode, a combination of jackpot symbols is not stopped and displayed on any active line. It is possible to prevent the jackpot symbol combination from being stopped and displayed even though it is not normal.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the change start process in the display-side MPU 102 is different from that in the first embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the change start process in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S1001, the display side time table is referred to. In a succeeding step S1002, it is determined whether or not information on the corresponding display continuation period exists. If there is information on the corresponding display continuation period, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not a mismatch flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If the mismatch flag is not stored, the processing from step S1004 to step S1007 is executed. The processes in steps S1004 to S1007 are the same as the processes in steps S703 to S706 in the first embodiment.

  If it is determined in step S1003 that the mismatch flag is stored, the processes in steps S1008 to S1014 are executed. That is, in step S1008, information on the still display period is read from the program ROM 103 and set in the priority counter area of the work RAM 104. In a succeeding step S1009, processing for setting a mismatching still mode is executed. In the setting process, the address information of the disagreement still mode information stored in the still mode information storage area 116 of the program ROM 103 is stored in the priority storage area of the work RAM 104. The disagreement still state information includes information for causing the disagreement stop result to be displayed statically over the still display period. Specifically, the drawing instruction timing information for performing the display and each drawing are displayed. The drawing list information at the instruction timing is set.

  In subsequent step S1010, a process for setting information of the display continuation period after adjustment is executed. Specifically, information on the time obtained by subtracting the static display period set in the priority counter area in step S1008 from the display continuation period grasped in step S1001 is set in the game times counter area 121a of the work RAM 104. To do.

  In the subsequent step S1011, the presence / absence of the jackpot result is grasped, and if the information of the jackpot result is included, the type of the jackpot result is grasped. Also, grasp whether or not reach has occurred. In subsequent step S1012, a stop result setting process is executed, and in step S1013, a setting process of a game mode effect mode is executed. In this case, in the setting process of the game-turn effect mode, the address information of the mode information of the game-turn effect and the mode information in which the high-speed variation display period is shortened by the amount corresponding to the non-matching still mode is stored in the mode information storage of the work RAM 104 Store in area 122. Thereafter, in step S1014, the mismatch flag is erased from the work RAM 104, and then the variation start process is terminated.

  By executing the processing of step S1008 to step S1012, after receiving the variation command, the time information is stored in both the priority counter area and the game times counter area 121a. In this case, the display-side MPU 102 gives priority to the subtraction process of the priority counter area every time the display control process is activated, and executes the subtraction process for the game times counter area 121a after the priority counter area reaches the initial value. . Further, in the processing for variation in the present embodiment, the description by illustration is omitted, but until the priority counter area becomes the initial value, the drawing corresponding to the image that displays the stop result for inconsistency every time the drawing instruction timing is reached. After the list information is output and the priority counter area reaches the initial value, the drawing list information corresponding to the effect image related to the new game round is output every time the drawing instruction timing comes.

  In the variation start process (FIG. 19), if there is no information on the corresponding display continuation period in step S1002, the mismatch start process is executed in step S1015, and then the variation start process is terminated. To do. The mismatch processing is the same as the processing in steps S708 to S711 in the first embodiment.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when the display-side MPU 102 newly receives a change command in a situation where an effect in a mismatch mode is being executed, a stop result for mismatch is displayed as a final stop. Later, the next game round effect is started. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that one game time has ended and the next game time has started.

  Further, when the display side MPU 102 newly receives a change command in a situation where an effect in the form of inconsistency is being executed, the still display over the still display period of the stop result for inconsistency is the next game play effect. The display continuation period is shortened by the static display period. Thereby, the influence by the non-matching stop result being statically displayed as described above is limited to the range of the next game turn effect.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a part of the processing configuration in the main MPU 62 and the display MPU 102 is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration in the present embodiment.

  As in the first embodiment, the main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 on which a main MPU 62 having a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 is mounted. The ROM 63 is provided with a success / failure table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, a main time table storage area 63c, and a command information storage area 63d. The RAM 64 has a reserved ball storage area 64a and various counter areas 64b. In addition, various flag storage areas 64c are provided. The details of these areas 63a to 63d and 64a to 64c are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  The main display unit 33 is connected to the output side of the main MPU 62 as in the first embodiment. Further, a holding lamp unit 35 serving as a holding information number display unit (special information number display unit) for clearly indicating the number of holding information stored in the holding ball storage area 64a is connected to the output side of the main MPU 62. Has been. The hold lamp unit 35 is display-controlled by the sound lamp control device 90 in the first embodiment, and in the present embodiment, the hold lamp unit 35 is the main control device 60 (that is, the main MPU 62). Display control. That is, the main MPU 62 directly controls the main display unit 33 that is a display unit for notifying that the game times are being executed and the lottery result, without using another control device, and the number of the hold information items. The holding lamp unit 35, which is a display unit for clearly indicating the above, is directly controlled without going through another control device.

  The main MPU 62 transmits various commands to other control devices, as in the first embodiment. Among them, a game time control command and a game state command for display control of the symbol display device 31 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90. In addition, when the number of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 64a increases or decreases, the main MPU 62 issues a hold information count command for causing the downstream control device to recognize the hold information count command. Send to. The sound lamp control device 90 transmits the received various commands to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form as it is.

  Similar to the first embodiment, the display control apparatus 100 includes a display control board 101 on which a display-side MPU 102 having a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104, a VDP 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107 are mounted. Yes.

  The program ROM 103 is provided with a display-side time table storage area 111, a mode information storage area 112, and a drawing list information storage area 113. Details of these areas 111 to 113 are the same as those in the first embodiment. Further, the program ROM 103 is provided with an abnormality stop result storage area 131 and an abnormality mode information storage area 132. The information stored in the abnormality stop result storage area 131 and the abnormality mode information storage area 132 is used when the game turn effect cannot be normally executed. Details thereof will be described later.

  The work RAM 104 is provided with a ring buffer 141, a hold information count storage area 142, various counter areas 143, and various flag storage areas 144. Among these areas 141 to 144, the ring buffer 141 has a function of storing commands received from the sound lamp control device 90 in time series, and includes a plurality of areas for storing the commands individually. . A write pointer that is updated each time a command is written and a read pointer that is updated each time a command is read are set. A command is written to the area indicated by the write pointer, and is indicated by the read pointer. Command from the specified area.

  Here, the display-side MPU 102 includes an input port 151 as information receiving means (or information receiving means) for receiving a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 90. The input port 151 has an area capable of simultaneously receiving information of a plurality of bits, specifically, 8 bits. The signal path connecting the sound lamp control device 90 and the input port 151 is provided with a plurality of unit paths in a one-to-one correspondence with the area of each bit of the input port 151. Then, 8-bit information is transmitted in parallel from the audio lamp control device 90 to the display side MPU 102. Incidentally, the configuration of the parallel transmission is the same when the command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound lamp control device 90. In this regard, it can be said that the main side MPU 62 transmits information of a plurality of bits in parallel toward the display side MPU 102.

  Various commands transmitted from the main side MPU 62 to the display side MPU 102 are set as information of a plurality of bytes, specifically, information of 2 bytes (16 bits). That is, when one command is received by the display side MPU 102, parallel transmission to the input port 151 occurs a plurality of times. Note that the configuration related to command transmission is not limited to the above, and may be configured to be transmitted in parallel in units smaller than 1 byte.

  The command received at the input port 151 is written into the area indicated by the write pointer among the plurality of areas of the ring buffer 141. This writing is executed not as a process based on software based on a program but as a process based on a dedicated hardware circuit. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to be executed by a process based on software based on a program. When one command is stored in one area of the ring buffer 141, the write pointer in the ring buffer 141 is updated so that the next area is a write target.

  Incidentally, when receiving one command, the display-side MPU 102 receives a strobe signal as a reception notification signal from the audio lamp control device 90, and completes reception of one command or information by one parallel transmission. In this case, a busy signal is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 90 as a reception completion signal. In other words, the display-side MPU 102 receives the strobe signal from the upstream side when receiving predetermined information and receiving the predetermined information in order to perform good communication with the control device on the upstream side. A busy signal is transmitted toward the upstream side. However, the busy signal may not be transmitted from the display side MPU 102 to the audio lamp control device 90. In this case, the audio lamp control device 90, which is the upstream control device, does not receive the busy signal. A processing program or the like needs to be set so that transmission can be performed satisfactorily.

  Of the areas 141 to 144 of the work RAM 104, the reserved information count storage area 142 is a counter area used for recognizing the number of reserved information stored in the main MPU 62 in the display MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 outputs an internal command to the VDP 105 so that the number of the hold information is notified on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 based on the information stored in the hold information count storage area 142. To do.

  The notification will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  On the lower part of the display screen G, a hold display area Ga is set. In the hold display area Ga, the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of hold information that can be held and stored in the main MPU 62 are arranged in parallel in a predetermined direction (specifically, in the left-right direction). Is displayed on the screen. Specifically, the maximum number of pieces of hold information that can be held and stored is four, and in correspondence with this, the hold display area Ga includes the first unit hold display area Ga1, the second unit hold display area Ga2, and the third. A unit hold display area Ga3 and a fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

  For example, when the number of holds is 1, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1. Further, every time the reserved number increases, the number of unit reserved display areas in which the image for holding is displayed increases in a predetermined direction, and when the number of reserved is 4, the first unit reserved display area Ga1 to the fourth unit. A hold image is displayed in all the hold display areas Ga4.

  The hold display area Ga is set so as not to overlap with the standby areas SA1 to SA9 on the display screen G, but is not limited to this and is set to overlap with a part of the standby areas SA1 to SA9. It may be. In addition, the image data of the hold image is stored in advance in the character ROM 106, and the hold display area Ga and the hold image are subjected to drawing processing in the video RAM 107 in the VDP 105 based on an instruction from the display side MPU 102. As a result, it is displayed on the display screen G.

<Various processes executed by main controller 60>
Next, among the various processes executed by the main control device 60, the winning process for the operation port and the data setting process will be described.

  First, the winning process for the operation port will be described. This process is executed in step S105 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) of the main MPU 62, as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a winning process for the operation port. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the upper working opening winning flag is stored in the RAM 64. The upper working opening winning flag is a flag stored when it is confirmed that a winning is made to the upper working opening 23 in the reading process in step S101. If the upper operation opening winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1108 without executing the processes of steps S1102 to S1107. If the upper working opening winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1102.

  In step S1102, the upper operation opening winning flag is deleted. In the subsequent step S1103, the value stored in the reserved number storage area NA of the reserved ball storage area 64a is read, and the start reserved memory number N stored in the reserved area RE is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, “4 ]) Or less. If the start pending storage number N is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1108 as it is. If the start pending storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1104, and the start pending storage number N is incremented by one.

  In the following step S1105, the values (each numerical information) of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S103 are stored in the free reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE. The data is stored in the first reserved area, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the number of reserved memories added by 1 in step S1104.

  In a succeeding step S1106, a hold command setting process is executed. This process is a process for setting a hold command for causing the audio lamp control device 90 and the display control device 100 that are downstream control devices to recognize that a new acquisition of the hold information has occurred. In this case, in the setting process, the number of hold information currently stored is recognized, and a hold command (information for increasing recognition of special information) including information corresponding to the recognized number of hold information is set. The hold command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in the external output process in step S201 of the normal process (FIG. 8), and is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 90 to the display control device 100. The display-side MPU 102 can recognize the increase in the hold information and the number of the hold information after the increase by receiving the hold command.

  If the display-side MPU 102 can recognize the increased number of pending information, it is not essential to be able to recognize that the pending information has increased. In this regard, the fact that the pending information has increased in the pending command. The information to be indicated may not be included.

  In a succeeding step S1107, a hold display update process is executed. In the update process, the control state of the hold lamp unit 35 is changed so that the number of hold information notified by the hold lamp unit 35 is increased by one. Specifically, the output state of the drive signal is changed so that the hold lamp unit 35 is in a display state corresponding to the number of pieces of hold information after the increase.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101, a negative determination is made in step S1103, or after the processing in step S1107 is executed, it is determined in step S1108 whether or not the lower operation opening prize flag is stored in the RAM 64. . The lower working opening winning flag is a flag stored when it is confirmed that a winning is made to the lower working opening 24 in the reading process of step S101. If the lower operation opening winning flag is not stored, the main winning process is terminated as it is. If the lower working opening winning flag is stored, the processing of steps S1103 to S1107 is executed after the lower working opening winning flag is deleted in step S1109. In this case, by making a negative determination in the process of step S1108 after the processes of steps S1103 to S1107, the main winning process is terminated.

  Next, the data setting process will be described. This process is executed in step S304 in the game turn control process (FIG. 9) of the main MPU 62, as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S1201, 1 is subtracted from the start-pending storage number N. In the subsequent step S1202, the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE.

  Thereafter, in step S1203, a process of shifting data (that is, holding information) stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3.

  In the subsequent step S1204, a shift command setting process is executed. This process is a process for setting a shift time command for causing the audio lamp control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are downstream control devices, to recognize that a shift of the hold information has occurred. In this case, in the setting process, the number of hold information currently stored is recognized, and a shift command (information for reducing recognition of special information) including information corresponding to the recognized number of hold information is set. The shift time command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in the external output process in step S201 of the normal processing (FIG. 8), and is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 90 to the display control device 100. By receiving the shift command, the display-side MPU 102 can recognize that the hold information has decreased and the number of the hold information after the decrease.

  If the display side MPU 102 can recognize the reduced number of pending information, it is not essential to be able to recognize that the pending information has decreased. In this regard, the pending information has been reduced in the shift command. May not be included.

  Here, when the data setting process is executed in the game time control process (FIG. 9) of the main MPU 62, the change start process is executed in the normal process (FIG. 8) of that process time, and the change command and type The command is set. That is, the shift command is set in the same processing time as the normal process together with the change command and the type command. These commands are all output in step S201 in the next normal processing.

  In other words, the main MPU 62 is configured to be able to transmit at least three types of commands in one processing time of normal processing. Both the variation command and the type command are transmitted. However, these three types of commands are not transmitted at the same time, but are transmitted in the order of shift command → variation command → type command within the range of one processing time in normal processing. This order is the same when the three types of commands are transmitted from the sound lamp control device 90 to the display-side MPU 102.

  In the subsequent step S1205, a pending display update process is executed. In the update process, the control state of the hold lamp unit 35 is changed so that the number of hold information notified by the hold lamp unit 35 is reduced by one. Specifically, the output state of the drive signal is changed so that the hold lamp unit 35 is in a display state corresponding to the number of hold information after the decrease. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

<Various Processes Executed by Display Control Device 100>
Next, display control processing executed when the display MPU 102 displays an image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 will be described. The display control process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the display control process. In the display control process, a command confirmation process is executed in step S1301, a confirmation process after a stationary display is executed in step S1302, and a hold display process is executed in step S1303. Thereafter, in step S1304, it is determined whether or not a jackpot effect is being performed, and the processing of steps S1305 to S1308 is executed on condition that the jackpot effect is not being performed.

  In step S1305, it is determined whether both the flag for variation and the type flag are stored in the various flag storage areas 144 of the work RAM 104. The variation flag is a flag that is stored when reception of the variation command is confirmed in the command confirmation processing in step S1301, and the type flag is stored when reception of the type command is confirmed in the command confirmation processing in step S1301. Flag to be On the condition that both the variation flag and the type flag are stored, the variation start process is executed in step S1306.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1305 or after step S1306, it is determined in step S1307 whether one game is being executed. On the condition that one game time is being executed, the mid-variation process is executed in step S1308.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1307 or after step S1308, the process proceeds to step S1309. In step S1309, the stop result of the previous game time is displayed, and it is determined whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed since the stationary display period has elapsed. When determining whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed, a start waiting effect counter area provided in the various counter areas 143 of the work RAM 104 is used, and the counter area has a timing at which the stationary display period has elapsed. Information on the start waiting period is set and updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the display control process is started.

  Here, the start waiting period is a variation start process in the main MPU 62 for the already stored hold information after the end of one game in the situation where the hold information is stored in the main MPU 62. (FIG. 10) is executed, a change command is transmitted, and a period longer than the time required for the execution of change start processing in the display-side MPU 102 for the change command to be normally completed is set. . As a result, when one game round is completed in a situation where the hold information is stored in the main MPU 62, display of the demo image is started immediately before the game turn related to the hold information is started. Is prevented. Note that the start waiting period is set as a period longer than a period required from the elapse of the static display period until it is determined to be a first start abnormality timing described later. The first start abnormality timing will be described later.

  If it is the start timing of the demo image, the demo image processing is executed in step S1310. The contents of the demo image processing are the same as those in step S610 in the first embodiment.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1309 or after the processing in step S1310 is executed, other processing is executed in step S1311. In this process, the same process as step S605 to step S608 in the first embodiment is executed, and the same process as step S611 in the first embodiment is executed. Thereafter, the display control process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the command confirmation process in step S1301, the confirmation process after the still display in step S1302, the hold display process in step S1303, the change start process in step S1306, and the process during change in step S1308 will be described in detail.

<Command confirmation processing>
First, the command confirmation processing in step S1301 will be described. The command confirmation process is a process for sequentially confirming commands stored in the ring buffer 141.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 25, in step S1401, it is determined whether a command to be confirmed is stored in the ring buffer 141 or not. If there is no command to be confirmed, this confirmation process is terminated as it is. If there is a command to be confirmed, it is determined in step S1402 whether the first byte of the command to be confirmed is in a confirmed state.

  As described above, the command received by the display-side MPU 102 is composed of 2 bytes. When the information of the command is distinguished between the upper byte and the lower byte, the upper byte is used in step S1402. It is determined whether or not the information is to be confirmed. The determination method is arbitrary, but in this embodiment, a confirmation state flag storage area is set in the various flag storage areas 144 of the work RAM 104, and there is no confirmation state flag stored in the area. The confirmation state of the first byte, and the state where the confirmation state flag is stored in the area corresponds to the confirmation state of the second byte.

  If it is in the confirmation state of the first byte, confirmation processing of each bit of the first byte is executed in step S1403. Specifically, in the command to be checked this time from the ring buffer 141, the information of each bit included in the upper byte is transferred to the register of the display side MPU 102, and the information of each bit is sequentially confirmed. Then, the confirmation result is stored in another area in the register of the display side MPU 102.

  In subsequent step S1404, the number of confirmations is updated by updating information in the counter area for the number of confirmations in the various counter areas 143 of the work RAM 104. Note that the information in the counter area for the number of confirmations is initialized when switching between the confirmation state of the first byte and the confirmation state of the second byte. In subsequent step S1405, it is determined whether or not the number of confirmations after the update in step S1404 is two or more. If the number of confirmations is less than 2, the confirmation process is terminated as it is. If the number of confirmations is 2 or more, the process proceeds to step S1406.

  In step S1406, it is determined whether or not the result of the process in step S1403 matches the previous time. If it does not match the previous time, the present confirmation process is terminated. In this case, the information on the higher byte in the same command is confirmed again. If it matches with the previous time, in step S1407, the information on the confirmation result in step S1403 is determined as the information on the upper byte in the command to be confirmed this time. By performing confirmation a plurality of times as described above, even if information is rewritten due to noise or the like during transfer from the ring buffer 141 to the register of the display side MPU 102, the influence is reduced. Is done.

  In a succeeding step S1408, it is determined whether or not the information determined in the step S1407 corresponds to the change command. In the command transmitted to the display-side MPU 102, the information on the upper byte is identification information for causing the display-side MPU 102 to recognize the command type, and is “C1” in hexadecimal, for example. In step S1408, it is determined whether the information confirmed in step S1407 matches the identification information.

  If the information matches the identification information, in step S1409, the still display flag is stored in a still display flag storage area provided as a storage unit for storing still display permission information in the various flag storage areas 144 of the work RAM 104. . The effect of storing the static display flag will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1408 or after step S1409, the second byte confirmation state is set in step S1410. Then, this confirmation process is complete | finished.

  By setting the second byte confirmation state, in the next command confirmation process, a negative determination is made in step S1402, and the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, confirmation processing of each bit is executed, in step S1412, the number of confirmations is updated, in step S1413, it is determined whether the number of confirmations is two or more, and in step S1414, the confirmation result matches the previous time. It is determined whether or not. The processes in steps S1411 to S1414 are the same as the processes in steps S1403 to S1406 except that the information to be confirmed is not lower byte information but lower byte information.

  In step S1415, it is determined whether the command that has been confirmed this time is a variation command. If it is not a change command, the process proceeds directly to step S1418. If it is a change command, the change flag is stored in the various flag storage area 144 of the work RAM 104 and the type flag is set in step S1416. It is determined whether or not the data is not stored. As described above, when both the variation flag and the type flag are stored, the variation start process is executed and the game turn effect is started. As will be described later, when the variation start process is executed, the variation flag and the type flag are deleted at the end of the process. Therefore, the state in which the variation flag is stored and the type flag is not stored means that the variation command is continuously received without receiving the type command.

  If it is not the above state, the process proceeds to step S1418 as it is, and if it is the above state, the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, the continuous abnormality flag is stored in a continuous abnormality flag storage area provided as a storage means for continuous abnormality information in the various flag storage area 144 of the work RAM 104. The effect of storing the continuous abnormality flag will be described in detail later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1418.

  In step S1418, a process for writing the confirmed information is executed. Specifically, based on the information determined in step S1407, information for identifying the type of command that has been confirmed this time in the display-side MPU 102 in the subsequent processing, is stored in various flag storage areas 144 of the work RAM 104. To store. For example, when the confirmation of the change command is completed, the change flag is stored, and when the confirmation of the type command is completed, the type flag is stored. Further, when the confirmation of the pending command is completed, a pending increase flag is stored, and when the confirmation of the shift command is completed, a pending decrease flag is stored.

  In step S1418, the second byte of the command to be checked this time, that is, information on the lower byte is stored in the work RAM 104 in association with the flag stored this time. In this case, only one flag storage area corresponding to command reception is set for each command, and only one area for storing lower byte information is set for each command. Has been. Therefore, in step S1418, even if information is already written in the area corresponding to the command that has been confirmed this time and for storing the information of the lower byte, new information is newly written to the area. Write information. For example, even if information is already written in an area corresponding to a command for change and where information of lower byte is stored, if confirmation for a change command is newly completed Then, the information on the lower byte is overwritten with respect to the newly confirmed change command.

  In the subsequent step S1419, the confirmation state of the second byte is canceled and set to the confirmation state of the first byte. Thereafter, in step S1420, by updating the read pointer information of the ring buffer 141, the areas to be read of commands in the plurality of areas of the ring buffer 141 are updated next. Then, this confirmation process is complete | finished.

<Confirmation process after static display>
Next, the confirmation process after the still display in step S1302 will be described. The confirmation process after the static display is a process for confirming the state after the static display of the previous game turning effect.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 26, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not one game is being executed. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not a big hit effect is being performed. If it is either during the execution of one game round or during the jackpot presentation, this confirmation process is terminated as it is. If it is neither during the execution of one game time nor during the big hit effect, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not a variation flag is stored in the work RAM 104. As described above, the variation flag is a flag that is stored when confirmation of reception of the variation command is completed.

  If the variation flag is stored, the confirmation process is terminated as it is. If the variation flag is not stored, it is determined in step S1504 whether or not the pending end flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 144 of the work RAM 104. As will be described later, the on-hold end flag is a flag that is stored when the game turn effect is ended in a situation in which the display side MPU 102 grasps that the hold information is stored on the main side MPU 62. is there. If the pending end flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1506 without executing the process in step S1505. If the pending end flag is stored, the process advances to step S1505.

  In step S1505, it is determined whether it is the first start abnormality timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first start abnormal period has elapsed since the stop result of the previous game times was displayed and the static display period has elapsed or immediately after the jackpot presentation has ended. When determining whether or not the first start abnormality period has elapsed, the first start abnormality counter area provided in the various counter areas 143 of the work RAM 104 is used, and the stationary display period has elapsed in the counter area. The information of the first start abnormal period is set at the timing at which the jackpot effect is finished or updated at every time the display control process is activated.

  Here, the above-mentioned first start abnormal period is the already stored hold after the end of the game play or the jackpot effect in the situation where the hold information is stored in the main MPU 62. For the information, the fluctuation start process (FIG. 10) is normally executed by the main MPU 62, the fluctuation command is normally transmitted, and the fluctuation start process in the display MPU 102 for the fluctuation command is completed normally. It is set as a period longer than the time required to do. For example, it is set as 1 sec. The first start abnormal period is set as a period shorter than the start waiting period.

  If it is determined in step S1505 that the first start abnormality timing is reached, in step S1508, the start abnormality flag storage provided as the storage means for the start abnormality information in the various flag storage areas 144 of the work RAM 104 is stored. The start abnormality flag is stored in the area. The effect of storing the start abnormality flag will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1508, the confirmation process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1505 that the first abnormal start timing is not reached, in step S1506, the display-side MPU 102 checks the main information on the display-side MPU 102 by checking the reserved information count storage area 142 of the work RAM 104. It is determined whether or not the hold information is held and stored in the MPU 62. If it is determined that the information is not stored on hold, the present confirmation process is terminated. If it is determined that the information is stored on hold, it is determined in step S1507 whether the second start abnormality timing is reached. Determine whether or not.

  Specifically, after it is understood that the hold information has been acquired in a specific situation where neither the game-playing effect nor the jackpot effect is being executed and the hold information is understood to be not stored on hold, It is determined whether or not the second start abnormal period has elapsed. When determining whether or not the second start abnormality period has elapsed, the second start abnormality counter area provided in the various counter areas 143 of the work RAM 104 is used, and the hold information is acquired in the specific situation. At the same time, information on the second start abnormal period is set and updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the display control process is activated.

  Here, the second start abnormal period varies when the hold information is acquired in the specific situation, and then the change start process (FIG. 10) is normally executed by the main MPU 62 for the acquired hold information. Is set as a period longer than the time required for normal execution of the change start process in the display-side MPU 102 for the change command. For example, it is set as 100 msec.

  If it is determined in step S1507 that the second abnormal start timing is not reached, the present confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the second start abnormality timing, the start abnormality flag is stored in the work RAM 104 in step S1508, and then this confirmation process is terminated.

<Processing for hold display>
Next, the hold display process in step S1303 will be described. The hold display process is a process for executing display control related to the hold display area Ga.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 27, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the hold increase flag is stored in the work RAM 104. As already described, the pending increase flag is a flag that is stored when the confirmation of the pending command reception is completed in the command confirmation process (FIG. 25).

  If the hold increase flag is stored, a hold information count update process is executed in step S1602. As already described, the hold command includes information on the number of pieces of hold information held and stored at the timing when the hold command is set. Specifically, the hold information is stored as lower byte information. The number of information is set. Further, as already described, in the command confirmation process (FIG. 25), when storing the hold increase flag in the work RAM 104, the lower byte information of the hold command is written in the work RAM 104. In step S1602, the number of hold information is specified from this information written in the work RAM 104, and the information of the specified result is overwritten in the hold information number storage area 142 of the work RAM 104. In this way, each time a hold command is received, the number of hold information at that time is specified and overwritten in the hold information number storage area 142, so that the number of hold information grasped by the display-side MPU 102 Accuracy can be improved.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1601 or after step S1602, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not a hold reduction flag is stored in the work RAM 104. As already described, the hold reduction flag is a flag stored when the confirmation of the reception of the command at the time of shift is completed in the command confirmation process (FIG. 25).

  If the hold decrease flag is stored, in step S1604, update processing of the number of hold information is executed. As already explained, the command at the time of shift includes information on the number of pieces of hold information that is held and stored at the timing when the command at the time of shift is set. Information about the number of pending information is set. Further, as already described, in the command confirmation process (FIG. 25), when storing the hold decrease flag in the work RAM 104, the lower byte information in the shift command is written into the work RAM 104. In step S 1604, the number of hold information is specified from this information written in the work RAM 104, and the information of the specified result is overwritten in the hold information number storage area 142 of the work RAM 104. Thus, each time a shift command is received, the number of pending information at that time is specified and overwritten in the pending information count storage area 142, so that the number of pending information grasped by the display-side MPU 102 Can improve the accuracy.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1603 or after step S1604, it is determined in step S1605 whether a start abnormality flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If the start abnormality flag is stored, in step S1606, the hold display prohibited state is set. Specifically, the prohibition flag is stored in a prohibition flag storage area provided as a storage means for holding display prohibition information in the various flag storage areas 144 of the work RAM 104. By setting the hold display prohibited state, a drawing list for hiding the hold display area Ga is output to the VDP 105 as a drawing list to be output to the VDP 105 for drawing instructions. It becomes.

  Incidentally, the situation in which the start abnormality flag is stored is a situation in which neither the game turning effect nor the jackpot effect is executed. Therefore, the drawing list for hiding the hold display area Ga may be output at the drawing instruction timing until the display of the demo image is started after the end of the game round effect or the jackpot effect. It may be output in the situation where the display of the demo image is being executed.

  When the VDP 105 receives a drawing list for hiding the reserved display area Ga, the VDP 105 performs a drawing process on the symbol display device 31 so that other images are displayed while the reserved display area Ga is not displayed. Execute. Here, since the drawing instruction timing is periodically set at a relatively short interval such as 20 msec in any display state, the hold display area is set at a relatively early timing when the hold display prohibition state is set. Ga is not displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1605 that the start abnormality flag is not stored in the work RAM 104, it is determined in step S1607 whether or not a variation flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If the variation flag is stored, the suspension display prohibition state is canceled in step S1608. Specifically, the prohibition flag stored in the work RAM 104 is deleted. When the prohibition state of the hold display is released, a drawing list for displaying the hold display area Ga is output to the VDP 105.

  Incidentally, when setting a drawing list for displaying the hold display area Ga in the display side MPU 102, the hold information number storage area 142 of the work RAM 104 is confirmed, and the number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga1 corresponding to the check result is confirmed. A drawing list for displaying the hold image is set in Ga4. When the VDP 105 receives the drawing list for displaying the hold display area Ga, the hold display area Ga is displayed and the hold images are displayed in the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 corresponding to the number of hold information. The drawing process for the symbol display device 31 is executed so that other images (for example, an image of a game effect, an image of a jackpot effect, or a demo image) are displayed.

  After executing step S1606 or step S1608 or when making a negative determination in step S1607, the process proceeds to step S1609. In step S1609, it is determined whether or not the hold display is prohibited.

  If the hold display is not prohibited, the hold display process is terminated. If the hold display is prohibited, it is determined in step S1610 whether it is an abnormality notification timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a notification generation period (for example, 1 sec) has elapsed since the suspension display prohibition state has been set. If it is not the abnormality notification timing, the on-hold display processing is terminated as it is. If it is the abnormality notification timing, after executing the abnormality notification process in step S1611, the process for holding display is terminated.

  In the abnormality notification process, for example, output of an abnormality signal to the management computer of the game hall, light emission of a predetermined light emitting unit provided in the pachinko machine 10, and output of an abnormality notification sound from the speaker unit 55 provided in the pachinko machine 10 Alternatively, at least one of the display of the abnormality notification image on the symbol display device 31 is started. The abnormality notification started by the abnormality notification process is canceled when the prohibition state of the hold display is canceled. Moreover, the timing at which the abnormality notification process is executed is not limited to the above timing, and may be the timing set in the hold display prohibited state.

<Switching between display and non-display of the hold display area Ga>
Next, how the hold display area Ga is switched between display and non-display will be described. FIG. 28 is a timing chart for explaining a state of switching between display and non-display of the hold display area Ga.

  FIG. 28A shows the winning status of the operating ports 23 and 24, FIG. 28B shows the number of hold information grasped by the main MPU 62, and FIG. 28C shows the game in the display MPU 102. FIG. 28 (d) shows the reception status of the change command in the display side MPU 102, FIG. 28 (e) shows the number of hold information recognized by the display side MPU 102, and FIG. 28 (f) shows the reception status of the hold-type command in the display side MPU 102, and FIG. 28 (g) shows the execution status of the hold display on the symbol display device 31. FIGS. 28A to 28C simply show the display contents of the display screen G at a predetermined timing.

  In the following description, a change command is issued on the display side MPU 102 even though the first start abnormal period has elapsed after the end of the previous game turn effect in a situation where the hold information is stored on hold. A case where the signal is not received will be described as an example. However, the manner in which the display and non-display of the hold display area Ga are switched in other situations is basically the same.

  At the timing of t1, the game turn effect that has been executed up to that point in the symbol display device 31 is ended. In this case, the number of pieces of hold information grasped by each of the main side MPU 62 and the display side MPU 102 is three. Thereafter, at the timing t2, the main MPU 62 executes a process for starting a new game round, so that the number of hold information recognized by the main MPU 62 becomes two. In addition, when the shift-time command is received by the display-side MPU 102 at this timing, the number of hold information recognized by the display-side MPU 102 is also two. In this case, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), the hold display area Ga is displayed in a state in which the previous game turn stop result is displayed. In Ga, it is clearly indicated that the current number of pending information is two.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the first start abnormal period elapses after the stationary display period of the previous game time has elapsed. The display-side MPU 102 outputs a drawing list for hiding the hold display area Ga to the VDP 105 at the next drawing instruction timing. Thereby, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, as shown in FIG. 28 (B), the hold display area Ga is not displayed in the state in which the result of stopping the previous game is displayed. However, even if the hold display area Ga is not displayed, the display-side MPU 102 does not initialize the number of hold information already known, but maintains a state where the information on the number of hold information is known. To do.

  Thereafter, at time t4, a new winning is generated for the operation ports 23, 24, and the number of hold information grasped by the main MPU 62 is added to be three. Further, when the hold command is received by the display side MPU 102 at this timing, the number of hold information recognized by the display side MPU 102 is also three. However, even if a new reception of the hold command occurs, the state where the hold display area Ga is not displayed is maintained.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the display side MPU 102 receives the change command. Thereby, at the timing of subsequent t6, a new game turn effect is started on the symbol display device 31. Further, the state in which the hold display area Ga is not displayed is canceled. Thereby, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, as shown in FIG. 28C, the hold display area Ga is displayed in a state in which a new game turn effect is started.

  By hiding the hold display area Ga as described above, the display side MPU 102 fluctuates despite the fact that the hold information is held and stored in the main MPU 62. When a situation in which a command for a game is not received occurs, the situation can be prevented from being emphasized on the display screen G, and a new game turning effect is not started on the display screen G. This makes it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable. In addition, when the change command is received, the display of the hold display area Ga is resumed so that the hold display area Ga is not displayed when the abnormality of the change command reception status is resolved. The state can be released.

  Even if the hold display area Ga is not displayed, the information on the number of hold information in the display-side MPU 102 is stored and held, and the update of the hold information number based on the receipt of the hold command or the shift command is executed. Is done. Therefore, when the display of the hold display area Ga is resumed, the number of hold information can be clearly specified.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the variation start process in step S1306 will be described. The variation start process is a process for starting a game turn effect on the display screen G when a variation command and a type command are received.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, in step S1701, the display-side time table provided in the display-side time table storage area 111 of the program ROM 103 is referred to. In the display-side time table, information on different display continuation periods is set in correspondence with the change commands transmitted from the main-side MPU 62 on a one-to-one basis.

  As described above, the change command is set as 2-byte information, and the upper byte contains information indicating that it is a change command and continues to be displayed in the lower byte. Contains period information. Then, when the variation flag is stored in the work RAM 104 in the command confirmation process (FIG. 25), the lower byte information is written in a dedicated area in the work RAM 104 accordingly. The display-side MPU 102 reads the display duration information from the display-side time table based on the information on the lower byte stored in the work RAM 104. The contents of the display duration information set in the display duration table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  After referring to the display-side time table in step S1701, it is determined in step S1702 whether or not the corresponding display duration information exists. That is, it is determined whether or not the information for specifying the display continuation period included in the variation command received this time corresponds to any of the information stored in advance in the program ROM 103 as the display side time table. To do.

  If there is information on the corresponding display continuation period, it is determined in step S1703 whether an abnormal variation flag is stored in the work RAM 104 or not. The abnormal variation flag is a flag that is stored when the variation command is not normally received and the game turning effect is executed in an abnormal state. Details will be described later.

  If the abnormal variation flag is not stored, it is determined in step S1704 whether or not the measurement of the display duration set based on the previous execution of variation start processing has been completed. That is, it is determined whether or not the variation start process has been executed while the game turning effect is being executed.

  When the abnormal variation flag is not stored in the work RAM 104 (step S1703: YES) or when the measurement of the display continuation period is completed (step S1704: YES), the continuous abnormal flag is set in the work RAM 104 in step S1705. In step S1706, it is determined whether a start abnormality flag is stored in the work RAM 104.

  If neither the continuous abnormality flag nor the start abnormality flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1707, and normal fluctuation start processing is executed. In the normal variation start processing, processing similar to that in steps S703 to S707 of the variation start processing (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, the game turn effect in a normal state corresponding to the variation command and the type command is started.

  Thereafter, in step S1708, flag erasure processing is executed. In the flag erasure process after the normal fluctuation start process is executed, the fluctuation flag and type flag stored in the work RAM 104 are erased. If a static display flag is stored in the work RAM 104, the static display flag is erased. The effect of storing the static display flag will be described later. Thereafter, the variation start processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1704 that the measurement of the display continuation period set based on the previous execution of variation start processing has not been completed, first abnormal variation setting processing in steps S1709 to S1711 is performed. Execute. Also, if it is determined in step S1705 that the continuous abnormality flag is stored in the work RAM 104, that is, if the variation command is continuously received without receiving the type command, steps S1709 to S1705 are also performed. The first abnormal fluctuation setting process of S1711 is executed. If it is determined in step S1706 that the start abnormality flag is stored in the work RAM 104, that is, the first start abnormality period or the second start is performed despite the presence of the hold information to be started in the game times. Even when it is determined that the fluctuation command has been received after the abnormal period has elapsed, the first abnormal fluctuation setting process in steps S1709 to S1711 is executed.

  In the first abnormal variation setting process, first, in step S1709, information on the display continuation period specified in step S1701 is stored in the various counter areas 143 of the work RAM 104 as a game times counter area 121a. Set to. The game counter area 121a is set as a predetermined byte area, specifically, a 2-byte area, as in the first embodiment, and is set with information on the display duration read from the display-side time table. The In this case, the information of the display continuation period is newly set instead of being added to the information already stored in the game times counter area 121a.

  After executing the processing in step S1709, in step S1710, information on the abnormal stop result is read from the abnormal stop result storage area 131 provided as a storage unit for the abnormal stop result in the program ROM 103 and stored in the work RAM 104. Let Here, the information on the stop result for abnormality is such that the combination of jackpot symbols is not stopped on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination of reach symbols is not stopped on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Is set. In this pachinko machine 10, it is set so that a predetermined combination of abnormal symbols that does not constitute both a jackpot symbol combination and a reach symbol combination is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. Any combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on condition that no combination of jackpot symbols is displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 and no combination of reach symbols is displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. It is good also as a structure.

  After that, in step S1711, an abnormal mode setting process is executed. In the abnormal mode setting process, the address information of the abnormal mode information stored in the abnormal mode information storage area 132 provided as the abnormal mode storage means in the program ROM 103 is stored in the work RAM 104. Here, in the abnormal mode information storage area 132, abnormal mode information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with all display continuation periods that may be selected by the display-side MPU 102. In step S1711, the abnormality mode information corresponding to the display duration set in step S1709 is selected, and information corresponding to the selection result is stored in the work RAM 104. As a result, the display continuation period set in the first abnormal variation setting process may be selected in any display continuation period preset in the display-side MPU 102. Corresponding abnormality mode information can be selected.

  In step S 1711, the address information of the abnormal mode information is stored in the work RAM 104, whereby the first drawing list information set in the abnormal mode information is read from the drawing list information storage area 113 of the program ROM 103. Output to VDP105. As a result, the VDP 105 draws an image corresponding to the information of the drawing list on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, whereby the game display effect in the abnormal mode is started on the symbol display device 31. Details of the game-playing effects according to the abnormal mode will be described later.

  In subsequent step S1712, the abnormal variation flag is stored in an abnormal variation flag storage area provided as a storage means for abnormal variation information in various flag storage areas 144 of work RAM 104. Thereafter, in step S1708, flag erasure processing is executed. In the flag erasure process, not only the variation flag, type flag, and stationary display flag stored in the work RAM 104 but also the continuous abnormality flag is stored, the continuous abnormality flag is erased and the start abnormality When the flag is stored, the start abnormality flag is deleted. Thereafter, the variation starting process is terminated.

  As described above, (1) when a variation command is received during the execution of a normal game turning effect, (2) when a plurality of variation commands are received continuously without receiving a type command, or ( 3) The change command is received after the first start abnormal period or the second start abnormal period elapses even though the display side MPU 102 knows that the holding information of the game round start target exists. In such a case, the first abnormal variation setting process is executed, and the game turn effect in the abnormal mode is started. The situation of (1) to (3) above is assumed to be a situation in which some abnormality has occurred regarding communication, and when a normal game-playing effect is executed in such a situation, for example, a game that has won a big win There is a possibility that the combination of jackpot symbols will be stopped and displayed in spite of the fact that the game is not performed, or that, for example, reach display is executed even if it is not a game game where the reach has occurred. On the other hand, the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above can be suppressed by starting the game turning effect in the abnormal mode.

  However, even in the situation of (1) to (3) above, if the information of the display continuation period can be normally read from the change command, the game turning effect is provided over the display continuation period. By executing the game time, the game time digestion time recognized by the main MPU 62 and the game time digestion time recognized by the display side MPU 102 can easily coincide with each other. Thereby, even when a game-playing effect according to the abnormal mode is executed, the game-time digestion time on the display screen G can be made normal.

  Here, as described above, the situation (2) is a situation in which a plurality of change commands are continuously received without receiving a type command. In this case, in the command confirmation process (FIG. 25), when information on the lower byte in the variation command, that is, information indicating the display duration is stored in the work RAM 104, a new variation command is received. In addition, the lower byte information is overwritten on a dedicated area in the work RAM 104. Therefore, when the process of step S1709 is executed in a state where the continuous abnormality flag is stored, information on the display continuation period corresponding to the last variation command among the plurality of variation commands received continuously is the game time. Is set in the counter area 121a. When receiving multiple variation commands consecutively without receiving a type command, the variation command received earlier is more likely to be an abnormal command. The possibility that the information of the normal display continuation period is selected is higher when the information of the display continuation period corresponding to the received change command is selected.

  In addition, even if a variation command is received in the situation where the abnormal variation flag is stored, that is, during the execution of the game turning effect in the abnormal mode, the first abnormal variation is performed by executing the process of step S1703. The normal variation starting process is executed without executing the setting process. As described above, the situation in which the game-playing effect in the abnormal mode is being executed is a situation in which some abnormality has occurred regarding communication. Therefore, the display continuation period grasped by the display-side MPU 102 is mainly It is assumed that it is longer than the display duration determined by the side MPU 62. In particular, as will be described later, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the display continuation period cannot be normally read from the change command, the display continuation period is normally specified from the change command. Information longer than the longest display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period information.

  Then, it is considered that normal reception of the variation command is likely to occur in the middle of the game turn effect in the situation where the game turn effect is executed in the abnormal mode. On the other hand, in this situation, the normal variation start process is executed, so that the game turn effect in the abnormal mode is executed even though the variation command is normally received. The possibility of being reduced is reduced.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process, if it is determined in step S1702 that there is no relevant display duration information, the second abnormal variation setting process in steps S1713 to S1716 is executed. In the second abnormal variation setting process, first, in step S1713, information on an abnormal period is set. Specifically, “1” is set for all the bits in the game turn counter area 121a of the work RAM 104, as in step S708 of the variation start process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment. That is, in this pachinko machine 10, the information on the abnormal period is stored on the processing program in the program ROM 103, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the information on the abnormal period is stored as numerical information in the program ROM 103. The process of setting it in the game times counter area 121a may be executed. This abnormal period is set as information longer than the longest display continuation period when the display continuation period is normally specified from the change command, similarly to the mismatch period in the first embodiment. Yes.

  In the subsequent step S1714, information on the abnormality stop result is read from the abnormality stop result storage area 131 of the program ROM 103 and stored in the work RAM 104. The contents of the abnormal stop result are as described above.

  In a succeeding step S1715, an abnormality mode setting process is executed. In the abnormality mode setting processing, the address information of the abnormality mode information stored in advance corresponding to the abnormality period in the abnormality mode information storage area 132 of the program ROM 103 is stored in the work RAM 104. Thereby, similarly to the case of step S <b> 1711, the game display effect in the abnormal mode is started on the symbol display device 31. Details of the game-playing effects according to the abnormal mode will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S1716, the abnormal variation flag is stored in the work RAM 104. Thereafter, in step S1708, flag erasure processing is executed. In the flag erasure process, not only the variation flag, type flag, and stationary display flag stored in the work RAM 104 but also the continuous abnormality flag is stored, the continuous abnormality flag is erased and the start abnormality When the flag is stored, the start abnormality flag is deleted. Thereafter, the variation starting process is terminated.

  As described above, when the display continuation period cannot be normally read out from the variation command, the second abnormal variation setting process is executed, and the game turn effect in the abnormal mode is started. Thereby, in the said 1st Embodiment, the effect | action similar to performing the effect for game times by the mode for mismatching arises, and there can exist the same effect.

<Change processing>
Next, the changing medium process in step S1308 will be described. The changing process is a process for updating the display of an image corresponding to the game turning effect when the game turning effect is being executed.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, in step S1801, refer to the elapsed time of game times measured in the game time counter area 121a and the mode information corresponding to the address information stored in the work RAM 104. Then, it is determined whether or not it is the drawing instruction timing. If it is not the drawing instruction timing, the process proceeds to step S1810 without executing the processes in steps S1801 to S1809.

  If it is the drawing instruction timing, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not a static display flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If the stationary display flag is not stored, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not an abnormal variation flag is stored in the work RAM 104. That is, in step S1803, it is determined whether or not the game turning effect is being executed in the abnormal mode. If the abnormal variation flag is not stored, a normal drawing instruction process is executed in step S1804. In the normal drawing instruction process, the processes in steps S802, S804 to S807 in the changing process (FIG. 15) of the first embodiment are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1810.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1803 that the abnormal variation flag is stored in the work RAM 104, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, it is determined whether it is after the final stop timing. If it is not after the final stop timing, in step S1806, the current drawing instruction timing is a standby timing in which symbols are displayed on standby or are displayed on standby in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is determined whether or not.

  If it is not the standby timing, the drawing instruction process for standby is executed in step S1807. In the instruction process, the drawing list information corresponding to the pre-standby production mode in the game mode production of the abnormal mode, and the drawing list information corresponding to the current drawing command timing is stored in the drawing list information storage area 113. Is read out and output to the VDP 105. Thereby, on the display screen G, the symbols of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scroll-displayed in the initial variation in the normal game-playing effect, that is, the high-speed variation display.

  If it is the standby timing, in step S1808, drawing instruction processing for swing display is executed. In the instruction process, information on the drawing list corresponding to the effect mode for swing display, which is information on the drawing list corresponding to the current drawing instruction timing, is read from the drawing list information storage area 113 and output to the VDP 105. Thereby, on the display screen G, the predetermined symbols are displayed in a swinging manner in a state where the predetermined symbols are standby displayed in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9.

  If it is determined in step S1805 that the timing is after the final stop timing, a drawing instruction process for still display is executed in step S1809. In the drawing instruction process, the drawing list information corresponding to the static display and corresponding to the current drawing instruction timing is read from the drawing list information storage area 113 and output to the VDP 105. As a result, the suspension result for abnormality is statically displayed in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9, and this is continued over the static display period.

  Here, the game turn effect in the abnormal mode will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 31 (a) shows the execution state of the effect for game rotation in the display side MPU 102, FIG. 31 (b) shows the period during which high-speed fluctuation display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and FIG. 31 (c). Indicates a period during which the swing display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and FIG. 31 (d) indicates a stationary display period. FIGS. 31A to 31H simply show the display contents of the display screen G at a predetermined timing.

  At the timing of t1, the game display effect is started on the symbol display device 31. In this case, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), high-speed fluctuation display is performed on the display screen G in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. After that, when the standby timing is reached at the timing t2, the state is changed from the state in which the high-speed fluctuation display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to the state in which the swing display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is done. In this case, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 of the display screen G, no combination of jackpot symbols is displayed on any effective line L1 to L5 and any effective line L1 to L5 is displayed. In addition, in order to prevent the reach symbol combination from being displayed, an intermediate stop symbol combination in an abnormal mode is further displayed on a predetermined effective line (here, the middle line L2).

  After that, at the timing of t3, the standby timing is not reached, so that the state where the swing display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is switched to the state where the high speed fluctuation display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. (See FIG. 31C). In addition, at the timing of t4 thereafter, the standby timing is reached again, so that the swing display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 from the state where the high-speed fluctuation display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. (See FIG. 31D).

  After that, the state is switched to a state in which high-speed fluctuation display is performed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at timing t5 (see FIG. 31E), and swing display is performed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at timing t6. (See FIG. 31 (F)), and at the timing of t7, the display is switched to a state in which high-speed fluctuation display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 31 (G)). The timing is switched to the state where the swing display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 31H). Thereafter, at the timing of t9, the state is switched from the state in which the swing display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to the state in which the static display is performed, and this state is t10 when the stationary display period elapses. It continues until the timing. Then, at this time t10, the current game turning effect is ended.

  In other words, in the game-playing effect in the abnormal mode, the state in which high-speed fluctuation display is performed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the state in which the symbol display is swung in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 until static display is started. And are repeated alternately. In this case, the period in which the swing display is performed is set longer than the period in which the high-speed fluctuation display is performed.

  When a game-playing effect according to an abnormal mode is executed, as described above, a display duration longer than the longest display duration when the display duration is normally specified from the change command is selected. May be. Then, in the middle of an abnormal game play effect, a variation command may be newly received, and the next game play effect may be started. Here, as will be described later, when a change command is newly received in the middle of a game round effect, a combination of symbols corresponding to the stop result of the game round is displayed statically, and then the next game round is displayed. Production is started. In this case, since the period of the swing display state is longer than the period of the fast swing display state as described above, the stationary display → the next game in the swing display state It becomes easy for a situation to start the recreational effect. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that a new game turning effect has been started in the middle of the game turning effect, and when the situation occurs, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, since the high-speed fluctuation display in a relatively short period and the rocking display in a relatively long period are alternately repeated, in a state where the high-speed fluctuation display is being performed, the still display → the next game Even if a situation that causes the start of a recreational effect occurs, it is easy for the player to recognize that it is a result of the above repetition being continued, and it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when the situation occurs. In particular, in the state where the high-speed fluctuation display is being performed, the player cannot identify the symbols that are scroll-displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or it is difficult to identify the symbols. Even so, it is difficult for players to feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, a configuration in which the swing display is continued until the display continuation period elapses after the high-speed fluctuation display in a short period is assumed. In this case, the player performs the game turning effect on the display screen G. It becomes difficult to recognize that there is. In contrast, the high-speed fluctuation display and the swing display are alternately and repeatedly executed as described above, so that the player can easily recognize that the game turning effect is being executed on the display screen G. Become.

  Incidentally, the combination of the intermediate stop symbols whose display is started at the timing of t2, the timing of t4, and the timing of t6 is included in the information on the mode for abnormality. On the other hand, the combination of stop symbols whose display is started at the timing t8 is a combination of symbols corresponding to the abnormal stop result, and this information is stored in the work RAM 104 as information on the abnormal stop result. In addition, the combinations of the intermediate stop symbols and the symbol combinations corresponding to the abnormal stop results are shown in FIGS. 31 (B), 31 (D), 31 (F) and 31 (H), respectively. Is different. Thereby, diversification of stop results is achieved.

  In addition, in order to diversify the manner in which each combination of intermediate stop symbols is displayed in a stopped state, the type of combination of each intermediate stop symbol is selected in the abnormal mode setting process in step S1711 or step S1715. Also good. In addition, as a combination of each intermediate stop symbol, a combination of symbols corresponding to the reach display may be stopped and displayed although a combination of jackpot symbols is not stopped and displayed. In addition, although it is not possible to diversify the mode in which the combinations of the intermediate stop symbols are stopped and displayed, the combination of the intermediate stop symbols may be the same as the combination of symbols corresponding to the abnormal stop result.

  Returning to the description of the mid-variation process (FIG. 30), if a negative determination is made in step S1801, or after execution of any one of steps S1804, S1807, S1808, or S1809, the process proceeds to step S1810. In step S1810, it is determined whether or not it is a game turn end timing, that is, whether or not the information in the game turn counter area 121a is an initial value. If it is not the end time of the game round, the mid-variation process is terminated as it is.

  If it is the end timing of the game round, is the number of the hold information grasped by the display side MPU 102 by referring to the hold information number storage area 142 of the work RAM 104 in step S1811, is “1” or more? Determine whether or not. If it is “1” or more, a pending end flag is stored in the work RAM 104 in step S 1812. As described above, the on-hold end flag indicates whether or not the game turn effect or the jackpot effect has ended in a situation in which the display side MPU 102 recognizes that the hold information is stored on hold. This is used when the display side MPU 102 makes the determination. Note that the processing of step S1811 and step S1812 is also performed when the jackpot presentation ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1811, or after step S1812, the abnormal variation flag is erased from the work RAM 104 in step S1813. Thereafter, the mid-variation processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1802 that the still display flag is stored in the work RAM 104, the rendering process for stationary display is executed in step S1814. . In the drawing instruction process for still display, information on the stop result stored in the work RAM 104 in the previous change start process (FIG. 29) is read, and the symbols corresponding to the stop result information are displayed in the standby areas SA1 to SA9. The information of the drawing list to be displayed statically is read from the drawing list information storage area 113 and output to the VDP 105. Incidentally, the stop result information (or mode information) stored in the work RAM 104 is stored and held in the work RAM 104 until new stop result information (or mode information) is overwritten.

  However, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and in the drawing instruction process for static display, the abnormal stop result is stopped regardless of the stop result information stored in the work RAM 104 in the previous variation start process. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, although different from the abnormal stop result, a dedicated stop result in which the combination of jackpot symbols is not stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 may be statically displayed. By adopting any of the above-described configurations, it is possible to prevent the combination of jackpot symbols from being stopped and displayed in a situation where there is a high possibility that a communication error of the variation command has occurred.

  Here, as described above, the static display flag indicates that the change command has been received when the information on the upper byte of the 2-byte command is confirmed in the command confirmation process (FIG. 25). This flag is stored by being specified. Further, when all the information of 2 bytes of the change command is confirmed, the change flag is stored, and the game turn effect is newly started based on the change flag. The flow of this operation will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 32A shows the execution state of the game turn effect in the display side MPU 102, FIG. 32B shows the confirmation period of the change command in the display side MPU 102, and FIG. 32C shows the stationary state in the display side MPU 102. FIG. 32D shows the stationary display period, and FIG. 32E shows the storage state of the variation flag in the display-side MPU 102. FIG. FIG. 32A simply shows the display content of the display screen G at a predetermined timing.

  First, a case where a variation command is newly received during the execution of a game turning effect will be described.

  At the timing of t1, the game display effect is started on the symbol display device 31. After that, at the timing of t2, confirmation of the change command is started by the display side MPU 102, and at the timing of t3, the high-order byte in the change command is confirmed once, and the still display flag is stored. The As a result, the game-turn effect that has been executed up to that point is ended even in the middle, and the static display of the game-turn effect is forcibly started. For example, in the case where the game turn effect ended halfway is not normal but due to an abnormal mode, as shown in FIG. 32A, the game stop effect is displayed in a state where the abnormal stop result is displayed. Will be displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the confirmation of the upper byte and the lower byte in the variation command is completed, and the variation flag is stored. However, still display is still continued at this timing. Thereafter, at the timing of t5, a new game turning effect is started based on the variation flag stored at the timing of t4.

  Next, a case where a variation command is newly received after execution of a game turning effect will be described.

  At the timing of t6, the game display effect is started on the symbol display device 31. Then, at the timing of t7, the static display is started at the timing of starting the static display in the game turning effect. Then, at the timing of t8, when the still display period elapses, the current game play effect is ended.

  After that, at the timing of t9, the confirmation of the change command is started by the display side MPU 102, and at the timing of t10, the high-order byte in the change command is checked once to store the still display flag. The Thereby, for example, even if the demonstration image is displayed until that timing, and the stop result of the previous game turn effect is not displayed, the stop result of the previous game turn effect is not displayed. It is displayed static again.

  After that, at the timing of t11, the confirmation of the upper byte and the lower byte in the variation command is completed, and the variation flag is stored. However, still display is still continued at this timing. Thereafter, at the timing of t12, a new game turning effect is started based on the variation flag stored at the timing of t11.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The display-side MPU 102 determines the game-playing effect corresponding to the variation-command transmitted from the main-side MPU 62, and further executes the game-playing effect on the symbol display device 31. In such a situation, the final stop display of the stop result is performed based on the determined game-playing effect without requiring the transmission of a confirmation command from the main MPU 62. As a result, as in the first embodiment, the main MPU 62 does not need to transmit a confirmation command, and the number of commands transmitted from the main MPU 62 can be reduced compared to a configuration in which a confirmation command is transmitted. Thus, it becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the main controller 60.

  When the display-side MPU 102 receives a change command in a situation in which the game-turn effect is being executed, the display-side MPU 102 causes the game-game effect to be displayed still and then starts a new game-turn effect. Thus, in the configuration in which the confirmation command is not transmitted from the main MPU 62 as described above, the variation command for starting a new game turn effect is also used as the confirmation command. Therefore, in the configuration in which an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the main MPU 62 is suppressed as described above, it is possible to satisfactorily control the game playing effects.

  In addition, when receiving the variation command in the middle of the game turning effect to display the game turning effect statically, the display side MPU 102 has completed the confirmation process for the higher-order bits of the received variation command. In this case, the static display is executed, and when the confirmation process is completed for all the bits of the change command, a new game turn effect is started. In other words, a period during which a game play effect currently being executed is statically displayed is ensured without shortening the display continuation period of the new game play effect. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the next game round has been started after the end of one game round while suppressing the effect on the new game round effect.

  Incidentally, the information set in the upper bit is information for distinguishing the variation command from other commands in the display side MPU 102, and information for distinguishing in this way is set. As a result, the type of command in the display-side MPU 102 is well recognized. In addition, the above-described still display is executed when the confirmation of the upper bits is completed, so that the superiority as described above can be obtained while using the configuration that can recognize the command type well. The effect which was able to be produced can be produced.

  In addition, in order to improve the accuracy of command recognition, the display-side MPU 102 confirms each bit of the received command a plurality of times, and the received command is based on the fact that the confirmation results are consistent. The process corresponding to is executed. In this configuration, when the change command is received, the static display is executed when the information on the upper bit is confirmed once. As a result, it is possible to accurately execute the game-turning effect for the reception of the variation command, and from the time when the static display is started based on the confirmation of the upper bits, until a new game-playing effect is started. It is possible to secure a long period of time.

  If the display-side MPU 102 specifies that it is necessary to start a new game-turn effect even if the variation command is not normally received, the display-side MPU 102 uses the game-use mode for abnormal use. Start production. As a result, the symbol display device 31 is caused due to a communication abnormality between the display side MPU 102 and the control device on the upstream side in spite of a situation where it is necessary to start a game turn effect in an abnormal mode. The occurrence of inconvenience such that no game-use effects are performed at all can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the display continuation period cannot be normally specified from the change command, a time longer than the shortest display continuation period that can be selected when the display continuation period is normally specified, more specifically, A game-playing effect is executed with a display continuation period longer than the longest display continuation period. As a result, as in the first embodiment, the display continuation period is extremely shortened when the game-use effect in the abnormal mode is performed because the display continuation period cannot be normally specified. Is suppressed. Further, when setting the display continuation period in this situation, it is only necessary to set “1” to all the bits in the game turn counter area 121a, so that the processing related to the setting of the game turn effect in the abnormal mode is simplified. Is achieved.

  Incidentally, in the configuration in which “1” is set in all the bits of the game turn counter area 121a as described above, a new variation command is received in a situation where the game turn effect in the abnormal mode is being executed. It is more likely to occur. On the other hand, as already described, since the static display is executed when the information on the higher-order bit in the variation command is confirmed, the end of the game-use effect in the abnormal mode is favorably performed.

  In addition, although there are multiple types of factors when the game-use effects for abnormal use are executed, any combination of jackpot symbols can be used, regardless of the cause for which the game-use effects are executed. A stop result that is not stopped on the active line is displayed as a final stop. If a communication error has occurred in the variation command, there is a possibility that a communication error has also occurred in the type command transmitted at the same time. Under such circumstances, the combination of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the game times when the lottery result in the main MPU 62 is not the jackpot result because the stop result in the abnormal game play effect is set as described above. Can be prevented.

  The display side is able to start a new game turning effect and the display side MPU 102 knows that the hold information is held and stored in the main MPU 62. When the MPU 102 does not receive the change command, the display-side MPU 102 stops the notification of the number of hold information on the display screen G. As a result, it is possible to prevent the above situation from being emphasized on the display screen G, and the player feels uncomfortable with the fact that a new game turning effect is not started on the display screen G. It can be difficult to hug.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of command confirmation processing in the display side MPU 102 is different from that in the third embodiment. FIG. 33A is a flowchart showing command confirmation processing in the present embodiment, and FIG. 33B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an information form of a predetermined command in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 33A, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not a command to be confirmed is stored in the ring buffer 141. If there is no command to be confirmed, this confirmation process is terminated as it is. If there is a command to be confirmed, it is determined in step S1902 whether or not the first byte of the command to be confirmed is in a confirmed state.

  If it is in the confirmation state of the first byte, in step S1903, confirmation processing of the bit to be confirmed this time among the bits included in the higher byte is executed. Specifically, 1-bit information to be confirmed this time is transferred from the ring buffer 141 to the register of the display-side MPU 102 among the higher-order bytes in the command to be confirmed this time, and the information on the bit is confirmed. . Then, the confirmation result is stored in another area in the register of the display side MPU 102. In other words, in this embodiment, information for one bit of a command composed of a plurality of bits is confirmed by one command confirmation process.

  In a succeeding step S1904, it is determined whether or not the confirmation of the bits in the predetermined order is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the confirmation of information for the upper 4 bits of the upper bytes is completed. If the confirmation of the bits in the predetermined order has been completed, it is determined in step S1905 whether the confirmation result up to the bits in the predetermined order is information corresponding to still display.

  In the present embodiment, a change command, a demonstration start command, and an opening command are set as commands that may be received by the display-side MPU 102 immediately after the end of one game round effect. As described above, the change command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 62 to start the game turn effect.

  The demonstration start command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 62 in order to start displaying the demonstration image. That is, in the first embodiment and the third embodiment, the start timing of the demo image is uniquely determined by the display side MPU 102. However, in this embodiment, the start timing of the demo image is determined by the main side MPU 62. The display side MPU 102 starts displaying the demo image based on the reception of the demonstration start command. The opening command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 62 in order to start the big hit effect.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the information format of the above-mentioned variable command, demonstration start command, and opening command is as follows. When the 2-byte information is expressed in hexadecimal, the variable command is “C1XX”. The demonstration start command is “C2ΔΔ”, and the opening command is “C3 □□”. That is, the variable command, the demonstration start command, and the opening command have the same information “C” from the high-order side to the bit in the predetermined order in the high-order byte. In step S1905, it is determined whether the confirmation result up to the bit in the predetermined order corresponds to the common identification information (specifically, “C”). If the confirmation result up to the bit in the predetermined order corresponds to the common identification information, the stationary display flag is stored in the work RAM 104 in step S1906.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1904 or step S1905, or after execution of step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, it is determined whether or not the confirmation of the upper byte is completed. In other words, it is determined whether or not all the bits of the upper byte have been confirmed. Note that it is necessary to execute the command confirmation processing multiple times (specifically, the number of bits constituting the upper byte) until the confirmation of all the bits of the upper byte is completed. The display control process to be performed needs to be activated a plurality of times (specifically, the number of bits constituting the upper byte).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1907, the confirmation process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1907, the information on each bit confirmed so far is stored together as the information on the higher byte in step S1908. Thereafter, in step S1909, the confirmation state of the second byte is set, and then this confirmation process is terminated.

  By setting the confirmation state of the second byte, in the next command confirmation process, a negative determination is made in step S1902, and the process proceeds to step S1910. In step S1910, the process of confirming the bit to be confirmed this time among the bits included in the lower byte is executed. Specifically, 1-bit information to be confirmed this time is transferred from the ring buffer 141 to the register of the display-side MPU 102 among the lower-order bytes in the command to be confirmed this time, and the information on the bit is confirmed. . Then, the confirmation result is stored in another area in the register of the display side MPU 102.

  In a succeeding step S1911, it is determined whether or not the confirmation of the lower byte is completed. That is, it is determined whether or not all the bits of the lower byte have been confirmed. Note that the command confirmation process needs to be executed multiple times (specifically, the number of bits constituting the lower byte) until confirmation is completed for all bits of the lower byte, and is started periodically. The display control process to be performed needs to be activated a plurality of times (specifically, the number of bits constituting the lower byte).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1911, the present confirmation process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S 1911, the confirmed information writing process is executed in step S 1912. Specifically, the flags corresponding to the command that has been confirmed this time are stored in the various flag storage areas 144 of the work RAM 104 based on the information of the higher byte stored in the register in step S1908. In addition, the lower byte information that is the current confirmation target is stored in the work RAM 104 in association with the currently stored flag.

  In the subsequent step S1913, the confirmation state of the second byte is canceled and the confirmation state of the first byte is set. After that, in step S1914, by updating the read pointer information of the ring buffer 141, the areas to be read of commands in the plurality of areas of the ring buffer 141 are updated next. Then, this confirmation process is complete | finished.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of effects that are started after a game-play effect is performed once are transmitted to the display-side MPU 102 to start these effects. All of the commands to be executed can also be used as a command for ending the game turning effect.

  The plurality of types of commands all have common identification information as information on the higher-order bits. As a result, even if any command is also used as a command for ending the game turning effect, the display side MPU 102 only needs to confirm the common identification information. Complexity can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the common identification information is set as high-order bit information for any of the above-described multiple types of commands, the game currently being executed can be used regardless of which command is also used. It is possible to secure a certain period of time from the start of the static display of the turning effect until the start of the next effect.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, unlike the third embodiment, command transmission to the display-side MPU 102 is performed not by parallel communication but by serial communication. Corresponding to the difference in communication method, the processing configuration of the command confirmation processing in the display side MPU 102 is different from that in the third embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing command confirmation processing in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 34, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to confirm an area where a command is received at the input port 151 (hereinafter also referred to as a command area). As described above, since command transmission is performed by serial communication, the command area of the input port 151 is 1 bit, and 1-bit information is sequentially transmitted to the command area. . Further, the audio lamp control device 90, which is a higher-level control device, transmits a strobe signal to the display-side MPU 102 when transmission of a command is started, and after receiving the strobe signal, the display-side MPU 102 The determination in step S2001 is performed by determining whether reception of one piece of information has been completed. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, information of one bit is confirmed once in one processing time of command confirmation processing among plural bits of information constituting the command.

  If it is determined in step S2001 that there is no need for confirmation, the present confirmation process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that confirmation is necessary, transmission of a busy signal from the display-side MPU 102 to the sound lamp control device 90 is stopped in step S2002, so that a new bit from the sound lamp control device 90 is obtained. Prohibit transmission of information. However, in a situation where the transmission of the busy signal has already been stopped, that state is maintained. Moreover, even if the transmission of the busy signal is stopped, the sound lamp control device 90 continues to transmit the information of the bit that is the current transmission target.

  In a succeeding step S2003, confirmation processing of information received in the command area of the input port 151 is executed. Specifically, the information stored in the command area is transferred to the register of the display side MPU 102. In a succeeding step S2004, it is determined whether or not the most significant bit of the predetermined command has been confirmed in the present confirmation process. If it is not the most significant bit, the process proceeds directly to step S2008.

  If it is the most significant bit, it is determined in step S2005 whether or not the information of the most significant bit is information corresponding to still display. In this embodiment, the most significant bit of the change command, that is, the information of the bit transmitted first when the change command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102 is different from other commands. . In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the most significant bit corresponds to the change command and is information that does not correspond to another command.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the information on the bits transmitted first to the display-side MPU 102 in the change command, the demonstration start command, and the opening command is common. In addition, the configuration may be different from other commands. In this case, in step S2005, it is determined whether or not the most significant bit corresponds to any of the change command, the demo start command, or the opening command and is information that does not correspond to another command. Become.

  If it is determined in step S2005 that the information does not correspond to still display, the process directly proceeds to step S2008. If it is determined in step S2005 that the information corresponds to still display, a still display flag is stored in the work RAM 104 in step S2006. That is, in the present embodiment, the static display flag is stored only by confirming the most significant bit in the command once. By storing the still display flag, the still display is forcibly executed on the display screen G regardless of the contents of the currently displayed image.

  In subsequent step S2007, the number of confirmations is updated by updating the information in the counter area for the number of confirmations in the various counter areas 143 of the work RAM 104. Thereafter, in step S2008, it is determined whether the number of confirmations after the update in step S2007 is two or more. If the number of confirmations is less than 2, the confirmation process is terminated as it is. If the number of confirmations is 2 or more, the process proceeds to step S2009.

  In step S2009, it is determined whether the information transferred to the register in step S2003 matches the information transferred last time. If it does not match the previous time, the present confirmation process is terminated. In this case, the same bit information is confirmed again. If it coincides with the previous time, in step S2010, the information transferred to the register in step S2003 is determined as information in the bit to be checked this time. Even if information is rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like during the transfer from the audio lamp control device 90 to the input port 151 of the display side MPU 102 by performing the confirmation multiple times as described above, The effect is reduced.

  In subsequent step S2011, transmission of a new bit information from the sound lamp control device 90 is permitted by resuming transmission of the busy signal from the display side MPU 102 to the sound lamp control device 90. In subsequent step S2012, it is determined whether or not the confirmation of all bits of information has been completed for a predetermined command. If it has not been completed, the present confirmation process is terminated. If it has been completed, the process of writing the confirmed information is executed in step S2013. Specifically, among the information of all bits of the command to be received this time, the various flags storage area 144 of the work RAM 104 corresponds to the command that has been confirmed this time, based on the information of the upper byte. Stores the flag. In addition, among the information of all bits of the command to be received this time, lower byte information is stored in the work RAM 104 in association with the currently stored flag. Then, this confirmation process is complete | finished.

  In the present embodiment described above in detail, when the received command is confirmed in the display side MPU 102, the information for one bit is confirmed in one processing time of the command confirmation processing, and the information of the most significant bit is displayed in a static display. In the case of the corresponding information, a still display is performed for the currently used game turning effect. Thereby, it is possible to ensure a longer period from the start of the static display of the currently executed game-playing effect until the next effect is started than in the third embodiment.

  Note that a busy signal may not be transmitted from the display-side MPU 102 to the audio lamp control device 90. In this case, in response to the fact that the display side MPU 102 does not perform the process of prohibiting the transmission of the next bit (step S2002) or the process of permitting the transmission of the next bit (step S2011). A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined transmission waiting period is set from the transmission of the information of the first bit to the transmission of the information of the next bit in the upstream control device. By setting the transmission standby period so that the display side MPU 102 can sufficiently confirm the information of each bit, the accuracy of the information confirmation in the display side MPU 102 is ensured.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied alone to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied to the configuration of each of the above embodiments in a predetermined combination.

  (1) In the said 1st, 2nd embodiment, it is good also as a structure where the confirmation command for making the game display effect in the symbol display apparatus 31 make a final stop display is transmitted from the main side MPU62. In this case, the display-side MPU 102 finally displays the game-turning effect when the confirmation command is received, and makes the final determination as to the game-turning effect as in the first and second embodiments. With the configuration in which the display is stopped, the display-side MPU 102 can finally stop and display the game-turn effect even when the received confirmation command information has been rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like and cannot be decoded. However, in order to reduce the number of commands transmitted from the main MPU 62, the configurations in the first and second embodiments are preferable.

  In addition, in the third to fifth embodiments, even when a communication abnormality of the variation command occurs, a configuration in which the effect for playing the game in the abnormality mode is executed, or a communication abnormality of the variation command occurs. If attention is paid to the configuration in which the notification of the number of pending information on the display screen G is stopped in this case, the confirmation command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 instead of the configuration in which the function of the confirmation command is shared by a change command or the like. A configuration may be applied.

  Further, as in the third to fifth embodiments, the function of the confirmation command may be shared by the change command or the like, and the confirmation command may be transmitted. In this case, even when a communication error of the fixed command occurs, the still display can be forcibly executed based on the reception of the command that is also used.

  (2) The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the variation command is transmitted each time the variation start process (FIG. 10) is executed by the main MPU 62. For example, when a plurality of deferred information is deferred and stored. In the configuration in which the determination result of the hold information with the later turn in which the game is to be started is previously specified by the main MPU 62, the display MPU 102 receives the change command once. It is good also as a structure by which a series of effects over a plurality of game times can be executed. Even in this case, it is preferable that the display-side MPU 102 can finally stop and display a series of effects regardless of the command transmitted from the main-side MPU 62.

  (3) In each of the above-described embodiments, the display continuation period set in the game turn counter area 121a when the change command is received has a time until the timing before the stationary display period starts. It is included, and when the time has elapsed, information on the time until the timing at which the stationary display period is completed may be newly set in the game turn counter area 121a.

  For example, when a change command is received, the display continuation period set in the game turn counter area 121a includes the time until the static display is started, and when the static display is started, the display is stopped. The display period information may be newly set in the game times counter area 121a. In this case, the change command may include a display duration information until the still display is started. The main MPU 62 may also be configured to set the time until the static display is started at the start of fluctuation, and to newly set the static display period information after the time has elapsed.

  In addition, when the above configuration is applied to the third to fifth embodiments, in the situation where the game turn effect is statically displayed based on the fact that the change command is received during the game turn effect, the change command A configuration may be adopted in which a static display period similar to the case where the game turn effect is normally ended is set at the timing when it is specified that the static display needs to be executed by the higher-order bits. Moreover, in order to suppress the influence on a new production, it is good also as a structure where the dedicated still display period of the range which does not influence a new production is set. In addition, when a change command is received during the game turning effect, the stationary display period is not set, and a new game turning effect is started as in the third to fifth embodiments. It is good also as a structure by which a static display is continued until.

  (4) In the first and second embodiments described above, the start waiting period from the end of the game effect to the start of the display of the demo image is not limited to 0.1 sec. The time may be 1 sec or more, for example. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the display of a demo image is started immediately after the effect for game times is complete | finished.

  (5) In the first and second embodiments, the display-side MPU 102 does not start the game turn effect when receiving the variation command, but starts the game turn effect when receiving the type command. A configuration may be adopted. Moreover, in each said embodiment, it is good also as a structure by which the command for exclusive use for a fluctuation | variation start instruction | command is transmitted from main side MPU62. Further, in each of the above embodiments, the main MPU 62 is not limited to a configuration in which two types of commands, that is, a variation command and a type command are transmitted at the start of a game round. It is good also as a structure which transmits a command.

  (6) In the first and second embodiments, the type command may not be transmitted at the same time as the variation command, but may be transmitted at a timing before the variation command. It is good also as a structure transmitted at a later timing.

  (7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the display-side MPU 102 does not determine the game-turn effect after specifying the display continuation period from the change command, but uses the combination of the change command and the type command for the game turn. It is good also as a structure which determines the aspect of production directly. Further, for example, in a configuration in which the main MPU 62 transmits a single command including information on both the change command and the type command at the start of the game round, the display side MPU 102 uses the single command for the game round. It is good also as a structure which determines the aspect of production directly.

  Further, in this configuration, when the display side MPU 102 cannot determine the display duration of the game turn effect from the received command, the display side MPU 102 does not execute the game turn effect according to the abnormal mode but from the received command. It is good also as a structure which performs the effect for game times by the aspect for abnormalities when the aspect of the effect for game times cannot be determined.

  (8) In each of the above embodiments, this is selected when the display-side MPU 102 cannot normally specify the display continuation period from the change command, or when the display-side MPU 102 normally specifies the display continuation period from the change command. One of the display continuation periods may be set in the game times counter area 121a. In this case, the longest display continuation period may be set, the shortest display continuation period may be set, or the complete detachment display continuation period may be set. According to this configuration, it is not necessary to store inconsistency period information in the program ROM 103 in advance. Even in the above configuration, when the stop result is displayed as a final stop, the combination of jackpot symbols is not stopped on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach is also displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. It is good also as a structure where the combination of a symbol is not stopped and displayed.

  Also, the discrepancy period or abnormal period is not the upper limit display continuation period that can be set in the game times counter area 121a, but is selected when the display continuation period is normally specified from the change command in the display side MPU 102 The dedicated time longer than the longest display continuation period among the displayed continuation periods may be used, or the dedicated time longer than the shortest display continuation period may be used.

  Further, even if the discrepancy period or the abnormal period is a time shorter than the shortest display continuation period among the display continuation periods selected when the display continuation period is normally specified from the change command in the display side MPU 102. Good. In this case, it is possible to prevent a new variation command from being transmitted from the main MPU 62 while the game turning effect is being executed in the inconsistency mode or the abnormal mode.

  Further, the inconsistency period or the abnormal period may be changed according to the number of the hold information that is held and stored at that time. For example, in the configuration in which the number of hold information is displayed on the symbol display device 31, the display side MPU 102 grasps the number of hold information by the hold increase command and the hold decrease command transmitted from the main MPU 62. In this case, the display-side MPU 102 refers to the number of the hold information when the display continuation period cannot be normally specified from the change command, and when the number of the hold information is the first number, the second number smaller than that. In this case, the mismatch period or the abnormal period is selected to be shorter than in the above case. In the main MPU 62, it is easier to select a shorter display continuation period as the number of hold information is larger. Therefore, according to the above configuration, a mismatch period or an abnormal period suitable for the number of hold information is selected. You can make it.

  (9) In the first and second embodiments, the display continuation period is normally specified without being limited to the configuration in which the high-speed fluctuating display is continued in the case where the effect by the mismatch mode is performed. Similarly to the case, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be sequentially displayed on standby. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the effect for playing the game is executed over any one of the display continuation periods of the display continuation period selected when the display continuation period is normally specified from the change command. It is good also as a structure by which the effect for game times is performed over a display continuation period, and it is good also as a structure by which the effect for game times is performed over the shortest display continuation period, and displays the upper limit in the counter area 121a for game times. It is good also as a structure by which the effect for game times is performed over a continuation period. Even in this configuration, when the stop result is displayed as the final stop, the combination of jackpot symbols is not stopped on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and further reachable on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. It is good also as a structure where the combination of a symbol is not stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in the first and second embodiments, when an effect due to inconsistency is performed, an effect for game times corresponding to a complete deviation that can be selected when the display continuation period is normally specified from the change command. May be configured to be executed. In this case, it is good also as a structure by which the aspect of the effect for game rotation selected according to the number of the hold information currently hold-stored at that time is changed. For example, in the configuration in which the number of hold information is displayed on the symbol display device 31, the display side MPU 102 grasps the number of hold information by the hold increase command and the hold decrease command transmitted from the main MPU 62. In this case, the display-side MPU 102 refers to the number of the hold information when the display continuation period cannot be normally specified from the change command, and when the number of the hold information is the first number, the second number smaller than that. It is set as the structure which selects the aspect of the effect for game times corresponding to the complete losing with a short display continuation period rather than the case of. In the main MPU 62, the shorter the display information period, the easier it is to select a shorter display continuation period. Therefore, according to the above-described configuration, the game-playing effect corresponding to complete detachment suitable for the number of hold information is provided. Aspects can be selected.

  (10) In the first and second embodiments described above, when an effect due to the inconsistency mode is performed, any one of the display continuation periods selected when the display continuation period is normally specified from the change command After the display continuation period or a predetermined time shorter than the upper limit display continuation period, the symbols are displayed in a high-speed variation manner in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and then the non-coincidence stop result symbols are waited in the standby areas SA1 to SA9. In addition, the display may be stationary after the swing display is continued. In this case, it may be configured to start still display at the timing before the stationary display period from the end of the upper display continuation period and continue it for the stationary display period. It is good also as a structure which continues a static display over a display period, and is good also as a structure where a static display is not performed. Further, in the above-described configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which still display is directly started instead of rocking display.

  In addition, when an effect due to the inconsistency mode is performed, the display continuation period is selected from among the display continuation periods selected when the display continuation period is normally specified from the variation command, or the upper limit display continuation period. After a game-playing effect corresponding to complete losing is performed for a shorter predetermined time, the symbols of the result of non-coincidence stoppage are made to wait in the standby areas SA1 to SA9, and further, the rocking display is continued, It is good also as a structure to display. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which still display is performed at the timing before the stationary display period from the end of the upper display continuation period and is continued for the stationary display period. It is good also as a structure which continues a static display over a period, and it is good also as a structure where a static display is not performed. Further, in the above-described configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which still display is directly started instead of rocking display.

  (11) In the first and second embodiments described above, when an effect due to a mismatching mode is performed, one of the display continuation periods selected when the display continuation period is normally specified from the change command After displaying the symbols at high speed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for a predetermined time shorter than the display duration for the display duration or for a predetermined time shorter than the upper limit display duration, the scroll display in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is set to the normal time. Similarly, it may be configured to end sequentially.

  In this case, after the symbols are displayed in a fast-varying manner in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 over the longest display duration among the display durations selected when the display duration is normally specified from the change command. It is preferable that the scroll display in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is sequentially terminated in the same manner as in the normal time. As a result, in the situation where a plurality of hold information is held and stored in the main MPU 62, the variation command related to the hold information that is the start target of the game times first is performed in the form of inconsistency. When the game times related to the next hold information are newly started, the high-speed fluctuation display is continued across the game times in the symbol display device 31. Moreover, when the effect by the mode for inconsistency is continued until the stage of the last stop display, stop display of all the symbol sequences Z1-Z3 is performed similarly to the normal time. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when an effect due to the disagreement mode is performed.

  (12) In the first and second embodiments described above, when an effect due to the non-coincidence mode is performed, high speed is displayed in all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 until the upper limit display duration period that can be set in the game turn counter area 121a. It is good also as a structure by which a static display is performed after a variable display is performed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which a static display is not performed.

  (13) In each of the above embodiments, when the display continuation period cannot be normally specified from the variation command, the variation command is not performed in the display-side MPU 102, instead of the effect in the disagreement mode or the abnormality mode. It is good also as a structure by which the production | generation by the mode for inconsistency or the mode for abnormalities is performed when the command which cannot be decoded in the condition which can be received is received. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the production | generation by the mode for inconsistency or the mode for abnormalities is performed when a classification command is received continuously to the command which cannot be decoded. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the production | generation by the mode for inconsistency or the mode for abnormalities is performed when the command which cannot be decoded is received continuously in the same period. In addition, even if the display continuation period can be normally specified from the variation command, when the other information included in the variation command is information different from the original, the rendering is performed in the mismatch mode or the abnormal mode. It is good.

  In addition, when the calculation result such as logical sum or logical product is performed using all bits included in the variation command, the display side MPU 102 recognizes that the variation command is a variation command. However, it is good also as a structure by which the effect by the mode for mismatch or the mode for abnormalities is performed when the result of the said arithmetic processing is not a predetermined calculation result.

  (14) In each of the embodiments described above, when the display side MPU 102 receives an opening command in a situation where a game turning effect is being executed in a mismatching mode or an abnormal mode, a combination of jackpot symbols is displayed as a final stop display. A configuration may be adopted. In this case, if the type of jackpot result cannot be specified from the opening command in the display side MPU 102, the combination of jackpot symbols selected in the case of a normal jackpot result instead of the combination of jackpot symbols selected in the case of a probabilistic jackpot result Should be displayed as a final stop. If the combination of jackpot symbols selected in the case of a probabilistic jackpot result is stopped in spite of the fact that it is a normal jackpot result, the player who expected the promising jackpot result will be discouraged, and the game will continue. This is because there is a risk of reducing motivation.

  Further, the display-side MPU 102 may be configured to identify the type of jackpot result from the opening command. In this case, it is preferable that the combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the type is finally stopped and displayed.

  (15) In each of the above-described embodiments, when an opening command is received in a situation where a game-playing effect according to a discrepancy mode or an abnormality mode is being executed, the opening result is displayed without the final stop display of the stop result. The configuration may be started.

  (16) In the first to third embodiments, the main MPU 62 may determine whether or not to start displaying the demo image. That is, the main MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period has elapsed without starting the next game time or the opening / closing execution mode from the timing at which the game time has ended. A command for starting a demo (a command for waiting for start) is transmitted. Then, when receiving the demonstration start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes processing for starting display of the demonstration image as the start waiting display.

  In this configuration, if the display-side MPU 102 receives a demonstration start command in a situation where a game-turning effect is being executed in a mismatch mode or an abnormal mode, the mismatch stop result or the stop result for failure is finally stopped. It is good also as a structure to display. In this case, a new change command is sent from the main MPU 62 in a situation in which the effect for game times is executed in the non-coincidence mode or the abnormal mode for the upper limit display continuation period that can be set in the game time counter area 121a. Even if the opening command is not transmitted, it is possible to end the non-coincidence mode or the abnormal game mode at the timing when the display of the demo image is started. It can be made shorter than the above embodiments.

  In the above configuration, the display of the demo image may be started after the stop result for mismatch or the stop result for abnormality is statically displayed over the static display period.

  (17) In the first and second embodiments, the display-side MPU 102 performs the drawing instruction timing without executing the processing in steps S802 to S807 in the changing processing (FIG. 15). By outputting to the VDP 105 the information of the drawing list indicated in the aspect information of the effect for playing the game corresponding to the address information stored in the aspect information storage area 122, the symbol display device 31 displays a standby display and a swing display. In addition, a configuration in which a static display is performed may be used.

  In the third to fifth embodiments, the display-side MPU 102 does not execute the processing in steps S1807 to S1809 in the processing for change (FIG. 30), and performs the work when the drawing instruction timing is reached. The drawing display information shown in the abnormal mode information stored in the RAM 104 may be output to the VDP 105 so that the symbol display device 31 can perform standby display, rocking display, stationary display, and the like. .

  (18) The variation display speed of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be configured such that the speed of the variation display is changed in three steps instead of two steps, such as high-speed variation → medium speed variation → low-speed variation.

  Further, the method of setting the low identification display mode (first identification display mode) and the high identification display mode (second identification display mode easier to identify than the first identification display mode) for the variable display of symbols is a high-speed variable display. And the configuration for setting the low-speed fluctuation display. For example, a configuration in which a part of the original mode is not displayed or difficult to identify such as making the symbol translucent is set as a low identification display mode, and all information of the pattern is displayed as a high identification display mode. Also good. Further, the low identification display mode and the high identification display mode may be set by both the change of the display mode of the symbol and the change of the variable display speed of the symbol.

  (19) The pattern variation display mode in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to that in the above-described embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the symbols are not scroll-displayed in a plurality of symbol display areas. The symbols may be switched and displayed one symbol at a time in each symbol display area. In this case, when the standby timing is reached when the symbols are variably displayed in each symbol display area, one symbol is displayed on standby in the standby area included in each symbol display area, and a standby display such as a swing display is performed. It is preferable that these symbols be displayed statically after the above is performed.

  (20) The display device whose display is controlled by the display-side MPU 102 may be a speaker unit that outputs a predetermined sound, or may be a light-emitting unit that emits light in a predetermined light emission mode. Moreover, the movable object by which the decoration was attached | subjected to the surface may be sufficient. Even in these cases, it is preferable to apply the present invention.

  (21) If the change command is a change command in the sub-side control device such as the display control device 100 and the display duration can be specified, the specific information form is arbitrary. In the change command, the information indicating that it is a change command and the display duration information are not set separately. Good.

  (22) In each of the above embodiments, when the game turn effect is started on the symbol display device 31, the symbols gradually change from the state where the symbols are stopped and displayed at the respective stop positions of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. A configuration may be adopted in which the speed is increased and high-speed fluctuation display is performed after a predetermined acceleration period has elapsed. In the said structure, in the said 1st, 2nd embodiment, when the effect by the mode for inconsistency is stopped and the effect for the next game rotation is started, a symbol fluctuates at high speed in each symbol row Z1-Z3. A configuration may be adopted in which the symbol is temporarily stopped from the displayed state, and thereafter the acceleration variation display is performed and the high-speed variation display is again performed.

  In addition, instead of the configuration in which the symbol is temporarily stopped as described above, for example, in the variation start process (FIG. 13) in the display-side MPU 102, the effect due to the mismatch mode is stopped and a new variation start setting is performed. In such a situation, if the current situation is concerned, the high-speed fluctuation display is maintained without performing the above-described acceleration fluctuation display, and the effect due to the inconsistency mode is stopped and the next game turn effect is started. Also good. In this case, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the effect due to the mismatching mode has been executed.

  (23) In the first and second embodiments described above, when the change command is received in a situation where an effect due to the inconsistency mode is being executed, the display-side MPU 102 currently uses the symbol display device 31 for game times. Although it was set as the structure which performs the setting for a new variation start, without determining whether it is the condition which is performing the production, it is not limited to this. For example, the display-side MPU 102 may be configured to make a new change start setting after determining whether or not the symbol display device 31 is currently executing a game-turn effect. . In this case, when it is determined that the current game play effect is currently being executed, a dedicated process may be executed, or a dedicated process may not be executed.

  (24) In each of the above embodiments, the measurement method of the display continuation period in the main MPU 62 and the display MPU 102 is not limited to the countdown method, and may be a countup method.

  (25) In each of the above embodiments, the standby display after the symbols are displayed on standby in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 in the game turn effect on the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the swing display. For example, a configuration in which a symbol is displayed in a vibration manner may be employed, a configuration in which a symbol is displayed in a blinking manner, or a configuration in which a symbol is displayed in an enlarged or reduced manner. Further, when a symbol is displayed in 3D or the like, a configuration may be adopted in which the symbol is displayed back and forth. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which only a part of symbols operate | move and a standby display is performed, for example, when a symbol is comprised with a character and a character, those one is still and the other is operating May be displayed on standby. Moreover, although the symbol is stationary, a state in which the color attached to the symbol is changed may be displayed as standby.

  Further, all the symbols waiting in each of the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 are stationary, but blinking display is performed in the waiting area set separately from the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 or the like. Or a state in which the change display of the pattern is performed may be set as the standby display. In this case, the static display means a state in which not only the symbols but also the other areas are statically displayed.

  Further, when attention is paid to the configuration in which the display side MPU 102 can uniquely specify the end timing of the game-turning effect, it is arbitrary that the standby display or the standby display is performed.

  (26) In the third to fifth embodiments, if a command corresponding to forcibly executing still display is received, whether or not a game turn effect is being executed. Regardless of the configuration in which the static display flag is stored and the static display is forcibly executed, the static display may be forcibly executed on the condition that it is in the middle of the game turning effect.

  (27) In the third embodiment, the storage condition of the still display flag stored as a trigger for forcibly executing the still display needs to be that the information on the upper byte in the change command has been confirmed. For example, information on some bits in the higher byte may be confirmed. Further, the still display flag may be stored by confirming information on all the bits of the upper byte and some bits in the lower byte.

  Further, in the command confirmation processing (FIG. 25), instead of the configuration in which each bit is confirmed a plurality of times when the received command is confirmed, each bit may be confirmed only once. Even in this case, the static display flag is stored and the static display is forced when a part of the upper bits in the command that also has the function of forcibly executing the static display such as the variable command is confirmed. It is preferable to be executed automatically. Thereby, it is possible to secure a certain period of time from the start of the forced still display to the start of the display of the next effect.

  Further, as in the third embodiment, in the command confirmation process (FIG. 25), in the case of confirming each bit a plurality of times when confirming the received command, a static display such as a variation command is forcibly executed. When all the bits of the command that also functions are confirmed once, the still display flag may be stored and the still display may be forcibly executed. Even in this configuration, the static display flag is stored at an earlier timing than the timing at which all the bits of the above-mentioned command are confirmed multiple times. It is possible to secure a certain period until the display of the next effect is started. However, in order to lengthen the period, the configuration in the third embodiment is preferable.

  (28) In the fourth embodiment, the storage of the still display flag that triggers the forced display of the still display is the highest level in the command that also has the function of forcibly executing the still display such as the change command. The configuration may be performed when a bit is confirmed. In this case, the timing at which the static display is forcibly executed can be made earlier than in the fourth embodiment.

  (29) In the fifth embodiment, the storage of the still display flag that triggers the forced execution of the still display is the highest level in the command that also has the function of forcibly executing the still display such as the change command. It is good also as a structure performed when not a bit but the bit of the predetermined order is confirmed. In addition, when the confirmation of the bit in the predetermined order is completed, the still display flag may be stored according to the information up to the bit in the predetermined order. In addition, a static display flag may be stored when all the bits constituting the upper byte are confirmed. However, in order to ensure a long period from the start of the forced still display until the display of the next effect starts, the structure in which the still display flag is stored when the most significant bit is confirmed. It is preferable that

  (30) In the third to fifth embodiments, when a command that also has a function for forcibly executing still display, such as a change command, is received, instead of the process of storing the still display flag, the timing It is good also as a structure which performs a static display by. In this case, it is possible to advance the timing at which forced still display is started.

  (31) In the third embodiment, the storage of the still display flag that triggers the forced execution of the still display is performed at a timing before the command received at the input port 151 is transferred to the ring buffer 141. It is good also as a structure to be called.

  Specifically, when the display-side MPU 102 receives a strobe signal from the upstream control device, the command information received at the input port 151 is confirmed a plurality of times, and successive confirmation results are the same. When there is no confirmation abnormality, the command is transferred to the ring buffer 141. In this configuration, when a command that also functions to forcibly execute still display such as a change command is confirmed once, the command is not stored in the ring buffer 141, but a still display flag is stored. It is good also as a structure which performs a still display compulsorily by performing. Also, in order to speed up the timing at which static display is forcibly executed, the static display flag is stored by storing a static display flag when some of the upper bits in the above-mentioned command are confirmed. May be configured to forcibly execute.

  (32) In the third embodiment, the main MPU 62 or the sound lamp control device 90 may be configured to transmit a demonstration start command in order to start display of a demonstration image. In this case, the command that also has the function of forcibly executing the still display may be a demonstration start command instead of a change command. In addition, in a configuration in which a shift command or type command is transmitted before a change command, a command that also has a function for forcibly executing still display is not a change command, but a shift command or type command. It may be.

  (33) In each of the above embodiments, the display-side MPU 102 starts the game turn effect at the timing when the variation command is received, and then receives the type command, so that the contents of the variation command and the type command are used. A configuration may be adopted in which the display mode of the game-use effects that have already been started is determined.

In this configuration,
・ When a command whose type cannot be recognized is received at the timing when the type command is supposed to be received ・ When the type command is received but some bit information is abnormal ・ After receiving the variable command or game The display mode of the effect for game times that has already been executed when at least one condition is satisfied among the cases where the type command is not received before the period that should have been received since the start of the production effect The configuration for selecting an abnormal mode may be used, and the configuration for displaying an abnormal stop result may be used although it is not an abnormal mode until halfway.

  (34) In the third embodiment described above, the first start abnormal period after the display-side MPU 102 confirms that the number of pieces of pending information is 1 or more in a situation where the game turn effect can be started. Alternatively, when a new variation command has not been received even after the second start abnormal period has elapsed, a game turn effect in the abnormal mode can be started without waiting for the reception of the variation command. Good. The situation where the change command is not received as described above is a situation in which the communication error of the change command has surely occurred on the condition that the number of hold information grasped by the display side MPU 102 is accurate. In such a situation, it is preferable to start the game turning effect in the abnormal mode without being subject to the reception of the variation command as described above.

  (35) In the third to fifth embodiments, even if a variation command is received in the middle of a normal game-play effect that is not an abnormal mode, it is a predetermined period from the end timing of the game-game effect. If it is within the previous range, the received variation command may be handled as normal. In this case, the variable command may be handled as normal if it is within the range of the static display period, or the variable command may be handled as normal if it is after the intermediate timing of the static display period, The configuration may be such that the change command is handled as normal after the standby display is started.

  In addition, in the above configuration, when a variation command is received in the middle of a game turning effect and the received variation command is treated as normal, the game turning effect already being executed is already determined. It is good also as a structure which is made to complete | finish according to the displayed display mode and to start a normal game turn effect after the completion | finish. In this case, it is possible to suppress the frequency with which the abnormal game play effect is executed.

  (36) In the third to fifth embodiments, when a variation command is received in the middle of a normal game effect, the received variation command is normal or abnormal. Regardless of whether or not there is a game-playing effect in the middle of the execution, the game-playing effect in the abnormal-use mode may be started after the game-playing effect is ended according to the display mode already determined. In this case, when a communication abnormality of the change command occurs, it is possible to prevent the normal game turn effect already being executed from being affected.

  (37) In the third to fifth embodiments, when the game turn effect is executed according to the abnormal mode, the game turn effect is executed in the same manner as the non-matching mode in the first embodiment. It is good also as a structure to be. Moreover, it is not limited to the said structure, It is good also as a structure by which each symbol row | line | column Z1-Z3 is standby-displayed sequentially like the case where a display continuation period is specified normally. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the effect for playing the game is executed over any one of the display continuation periods of the display continuation period selected when the display continuation period is normally specified from the change command. It is good also as a structure by which the effect for game times is performed over a display continuation period, and it is good also as a structure by which the effect for game times is performed over the shortest display continuation period, and displays the upper limit in the counter area 121a for game times. It is good also as a structure by which the effect for game times is performed over a continuation period.

  In addition, after the reach display is not performed and the combination of the jackpot symbols is not stopped and displayed, the scroll display corresponding to the result of losing is performed over the shortest display continuation period or the display continuation period shorter than the shortest display continuation period. The standby display is performed until the abnormal period set for the production effect elapses or immediately before the abnormal period elapses, and the stop result displayed on the standby display may be statically displayed. . In this case, the ratio of the period in which the standby display and the static display are executed in the display period of the game times effect is larger than that in the case where the game times effect is normally executed. In addition, with this configuration, even if a normal game-playing effect is newly started during the execution of the game-playing effect according to the abnormal mode, the standby display is executed with the game-playing effect according to the abnormal-use mode. In this situation, the command for change is received. Then, a new game turn effect is started from the standby display state, or a new game turn effect is started after the standby display state is statically displayed. Therefore, the transition to the new game-use effect is smoothly performed as compared with the configuration in which the new game-use effect is started.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the during-waiting display that each symbol which comprises the stop result for abnormalities is a rocking display in standby area SA1-SA9 is performed from the start timing to the end timing of the effect for game rotation by the mode for abnormalities. In addition, a stop result that does not correspond to any combination of reach display and jackpot symbol may be sequentially switched without accompanying scroll display from the start timing to the end timing of the effect for game play in the abnormal mode. . Even in these cases, the proportion of the period in which the standby display (or still display) is executed in the display period of the game times effect is larger than that in the case where the game times effect is normally executed. .

  (38) In a configuration in which it is normal to receive a plurality of types of commands when a game turning effect is started, the display side MPU 102 receives the reception command in a situation where reception of the previous command has not been confirmed. A game according to an abnormal mode when reception of a command with a later order is confirmed or when reception of a command with a later reception order is not confirmed within a predetermined period after confirmation of reception of a previous command with a reception order It is good also as a structure by which the rotation effect is performed.

  Further, in a configuration in which it is normal to receive three or more types of commands when a game turning effect is started, the display-side MPU 102 receives two or more types of commands that are part of those commands. In a situation in which the game is confirmed, if the reception of the remaining commands is not confirmed within the predetermined period, the game turn effect may be executed according to the abnormal mode. Further, when a game turn effect is started, in a configuration in which it is normal to receive three or more types of commands in the order of the first command → the second command → the third command, the display MPU 102 Thus, when the reception of the first command and the third command is confirmed in a situation where the reception of the second command has not been confirmed, a game turn effect in the abnormal mode may be executed.

  (39) In the third to fifth embodiments, when a hold display for notifying the number of hold information on the display screen G is performed, areas corresponding to the numbers of hold information are partitioned in the hold display area Ga. In addition to being displayed, when the hold display is stopped, the notification in the hold display area Ga including the section display is not performed. In other words, when the hold display is stopped, the player can be suggested that the hold display is stopped. On the other hand, it is good also as a structure by which a hold display is stopped without the said suggestion being performed.

  For example, in the state where the partition display is left in the hold display area Ga, the display is made similar to the case where the number of the hold information is 0, such as deleting the display of “●” in each partition portion. It is good also as a structure which stops a display. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which division display is not performed in the hold display area Ga irrespective of whether it is the situation where the hold display is stopped. Also in this case, in a situation where the hold display is stopped, the same display as when the number of hold information is 0 is performed. By not suggesting that the hold display is stopped in this way, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with respect to the stop display being stopped on the display screen G.

  (40) In the third to fifth embodiments, when one game play effect is completed on the display screen G, the shift command is received before the shift command is received or the shift command is received. The hold display on the display screen G may always be canceled before the reception result is reflected on the hold display on the display screen G. Further, instead of this configuration, when a shift command is received, the hold display on the display screen G is always canceled before the reception result is reflected on the hold display on the display screen G. Good. In these cases, for example, when the main MPU 62 executes the determination processing for the predetermined hold information, the display MP G102 does not receive the change command, so that the game screen can be used for game play. Even if the production is not started, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the state in which the number of the hold information notified on the display screen G is subtracted. Therefore, the possibility that the player recognizes that part of the hold information has been invalidated is reduced.

  Further, in the above configuration, based on having received the command received when the game turn effect is normally started, such as the change command or the type command, the state in which the hold display on the display screen G is stopped. It is good to make it the structure which cancels. Thereby, when the communication with respect to the display side MPU 102 is normally performed, the period during which the hold display is stopped becomes short.

  (41) In the third to fifth embodiments, the main lamp MPU 62 may not perform display control of the hold lamp unit 35, but the audio lamp control device 90 may perform display control, and the display MPU 102 may perform display control. It is good also as composition to do. In any of these configurations, even when the hold display on the display screen G is stopped, the notification in the hold lamp unit 35 may be continued.

  (42) In the third to fifth embodiments, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the holding lamp unit 35 is used as the holding information number display unit, and the number of the holding information is different from the display screen G. If notification is performed, a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or the like having a display screen may be used, or a segment display device may be used. Further, the position of the on-hold information number display unit is arbitrary, but it may be arranged at a position where a flow area of game balls in the game area intervenes with the display screen G, for example. In this case, the degree of attention to the notification of the number of hold information on the display screen G is higher than that of the hold information number display unit.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which is a low identification aspect compared with the alerting | reporting aspect of the number of pending | holding information in the display screen G in the alerting | reporting aspect of the number of pending | holding information in a pending | holding information number display part. For example, in the notification of the number of hold information on the display screen G, the display area is set in one-to-one correspondence with the number of hold information, and the number of hold information in the hold information number display unit is notified. Then, it is good also as a structure by which the display area is not set corresponding to the number of holding information on a one-to-one basis. More specifically, in the notification of the number of hold information in the hold information display unit, the number of display areas set individually is smaller than the number of hold information, and the display pattern of each display area is changed. The configuration may be such that notification of the number of hold information is performed.

  (43) In the third to fifth embodiments, when the notification of the number of the hold information on the display screen G is stopped, the notification of the number of the hold information in the hold lamp unit 35 is also stopped. Good.

  Further, the display means for notifying the number of the hold information by the control of the display side MPU 102 is not limited to the symbol display device 31, and is a display device or a light emitting unit provided separately from the symbol display device 31. There may be. In this case, if the hold display stop condition is satisfied, the notification in the display device or the light emitting unit may be stopped. However, when a game turning effect or the like is executed, it is considered that the player pays attention to the display screen G, and for the player who pays attention to the display screen G in this way, the display screen G is reserved. The notification of the number of information makes it easier to visually recognize the notification content.

  (44) In the third to fifth embodiments, the reception abnormal period after receiving a command transmitted prior to the variation command when starting the game turning effect, such as a shift command. A configuration in which the hold display on the display screen G is canceled when the variation command or the type command is not received before the time elapses, or when the game turning effect is not started before the abnormal reception period elapses. It is good.

  In addition, the period set as a condition for discontinuing the notification of the number of hold information on the display screen G is not abnormal because it is confirmed that the number of hold information is 1 or more and the change command is not received. You may set as a period different from the period used as the reference | standard from which the effect for game times of an aspect is started. For example, the former period may be shorter than the latter period, and the former period may be longer than the latter period.

  (45) In the third to fifth embodiments, the release of the state in which the notification of the number of the hold information is stopped on the display screen G is not performed by receiving the change command, but the game It is good also as a structure performed when the rotation effect is newly started.

  (46) In the third to fifth embodiments, the shift command may not be set, and the shift command may be combined with the shift command function. In this case, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process for starting the game turn effect based on the reception of the variation command, and a process for updating the notification of the number of hold information on the display screen G. Will be executed.

  (47) In the third to fifth embodiments, the hold command and the shift command do not include the information on the number of the hold information, but the hold command is used as information indicating that the number of the hold information has increased. May be transmitted, and a shift time command may be transmitted as information indicating that the number of pending information has decreased. In this case, when the display-side MPU 102 receives a hold command, the display-side MPU 102 updates the information in the hold information number storage area 142 so that the recognized hold information number is incremented by 1, and when the shift command is received. The information in the hold information count storage area 142 may be updated so that the recognized hold information count is decremented by one.

  Here, in the configuration in which addition or subtraction of the number of hold information recognized by the display-side MPU 102 is performed based on reception of the hold command or shift command as described above, the number of hold information and each command are stored. Unless the update of the number of the hold information based on the reception of the message is continued, the number of the hold information cannot be accurately grasped. Therefore, in the configuration, even in a situation where the notification of the number of the hold information on the display screen G is stopped, it is necessary to continue storing and updating the information in the hold information number storage area 142.

  (48) In each of the embodiments described above, in the situation where a communication abnormality has occurred, a game-turning effect according to an abnormality mode is executed on the display screen G, so that the game-turning effect is originally executed. When attention is paid to the remarkable effect that the occurrence of inconvenience that the game turning effect is not performed at all, even though the situation is necessary, a confirmation command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the configuration. It may be applied to a configuration in which the function for forcibly performing still display is not used in the command for variation, and the notification of the number of hold information on the display screen G is not stopped. You may apply.

  (49) In each of the above-described embodiments, the function for forcibly executing the static display is also used as a command such as a change command, so that the display side MPU 102 has a good trigger for the end of the game turning effect. When paying attention to the remarkable effect of being able to recognize, the configuration may be applied to a configuration in which the game turning effect is not executed on the display screen G in a situation where a communication abnormality has occurred. You may apply to the structure by which the alerting | reporting of the number of hold information in is not stopped.

  (50) In each of the above embodiments, the notification of the number of hold information on the display screen G is stopped, so that the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed when there is a possibility that the inconvenience may occur if the notification is continued. When paying attention to the remarkable effect, the configuration may be applied to a configuration in which the game turning effect is not executed on the display screen G in a situation where communication abnormality occurs, and a confirmation command is transmitted from the main MPU 62. The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which a function for forcibly performing a still display is not used in a command for variation.

  (51) The hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 24 are stored separately, and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 24 has priority. The structure digested may be applied, and conversely, the structure in which the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 is preferentially digested may be applied.

  In addition, the lower working port 24 may not be provided with the electric accessory 24a, and the winning frequency may be applied to both the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 so that the winning frequency does not depend on the gaming state.

  In addition, the plurality of operation ports are not arranged side by side, but a first operation port corresponding to the upper operation port 23 and a second operation port corresponding to the lower operation port 24 are arranged side by side. It is good also as a structure, and it is good also as a structure by which these operation ports were arranged in parallel diagonally. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which arrange | positions both operation openings apart so that only the winning to the 1st operation opening or the winning to the 2nd operation opening can be aimed according to the operation mode of the launch handle 51. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to aim for only one winning of the first operating port or the second operating port in accordance with the hold notice.

  Further, the main display unit 33 displays a first display area for displaying the result of determination of whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23 and the holding information acquired based on the winning to the lower operating port 24 are displayed. And a second display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not. In this case, the change display of the pattern in the first display area is based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. Is started and a stop result corresponding to the determination of the success / failure is displayed, and the change display for one game time is ended. In addition, the change display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 24 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. At the same time, the stop result corresponding to the determination of success / failure is displayed, and the display of the variation of one game time is ended.

  (52) A player when the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 becomes a target of determination of success / failure and when the hold information related to winning a prize in the lower operating port 24 becomes a target of determination of success / failure It is good also as a structure from which the profit which is obtained differs. Further, the number of operation ports is not limited to two and may be three or more. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with only one working port.

  (53) In each of the embodiments described above, the display control device 100 is controlled by the sound lamp control device 90 based on the command output from the main control device 60. Instead, the main control device 60 is used. The display control device 100 may be configured to control the sound lamp control device 90 based on the command output from the. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound lamp control device 90 and the display control device 100 are provided separately, the control devices 90 and 100 may be configured as a control device on one sub-side.

  Further, the main control device 60 may be configured such that the display control content in the symbol display device 31 is performed by the sound lamp control device 90 and the display control device 100 without determining the symbol display duration. In addition, a first display control device and a second display control device are provided as the display control device 100, and both display control devices cooperate based on a command from the main control device 60 or the sound lamp control device 90. The display may be configured to perform display control.

  The main control device 60 includes a display control device provided separately from the main control device 60, a sound control device provided separately from the main control device 60, and a light emission control device provided separately from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 may be configured to transmit command information to each of the sound control device and the light emission control device based on the command. In addition, the main control device 60, a sub-side overall control device provided separately from the main control device 60, a display control device provided separately from the main control device 60, a voice control device provided separately from the display control device, and a light emission provided separately therefrom. A control device, and the sub-side overall control device may transmit command information to each of the display control device, the sound control device, and the light emission control device based on a command from the main control device 60.

  Further, a relay board may be interposed in the middle of the signal path between the main controller 60 and the audio lamp controller 90 or in the middle of the signal path between the audio lamp controller 90 and the display controller 100. In any of these cases, the main control device 60 can be regarded as the first control means, and the combination of the sound lamp control device 90, the display control device 100 and the relay board can be regarded as the second control means. . Further, for example, when the relay board is interposed in the signal path between the main control device 60 and the sound lamp control device 90 as in the former case, when the main control device 60 is regarded as the first control means, the relay is performed. The combination of the board and the sound lamp control device 90 can be regarded as the second control means on the upstream side, and the display control device 100 can be regarded as the second control means on the downstream side.

  In addition, the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 that are directly displayed and controlled in the main controller 60 may be omitted.

  (54) In each of the above embodiments, the voice lamp control device 90 is configured to transmit the received various commands to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form as it is, but is not limited thereto. When the voice lamp control device 90 receives various commands, a command corresponding to the decoding result or calculation result of the command may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 90 to the display side MPU 102. For example, when the sound lamp control device 90 receives a variation command, the variation pattern command may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 90 toward the display side MPU 102.

  In this case, although the variation pattern command is different in information form (information of each bit) from the variation command, the variation pattern command includes the same type of information as the information included in the variation command (for example, display duration information). Alternatively, some types of information included in the variation command may not be included, or different types of information from the variation command may be included. The same applies to various commands other than the change command, such as a type command, an opening command, a hold command, and a shift command.

  Further, in this configuration, when a command is received by the audio lamp control device 90, a command developed corresponding to the decoding result or calculation result for the reception may be transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. . For example, when one command is received by the sound lamp control device 90, a plurality of commands corresponding to the decoding result or the calculation result for the reception may be transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 90 receives a change command, the voice lamp control device 90 transmits a display duration command and a change start command to the display-side MPU 102. It is good also as a structure.

  In addition, when a plurality of predetermined commands are received by the sound lamp control device 90, more or less commands than the predetermined plurality are displayed as commands corresponding to the decoding result or calculation result for the reception. It is good also as a structure transmitted toward. Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 90 receives a variation command and a type command, a command for display duration and a game result command are transmitted from the voice lamp control device 90 to the display side MPU 102. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  (55) In each of the above embodiments, one game round in the main display unit 33 is started based on the determination of whether or not the main control device 60 has made a determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Based on the fact that when the conditions for determining whether or not the main control device 60 is determined are satisfied, the game times are started at a timing before the timing at which the determination is actually made, and the determination is made thereafter. It is good also as a structure by which the subsequent display mode, display continuation period, and stop result in the game round are determined. In this case, the main control device 60 first transmits a change command when the game turn start timing is reached, and then determines whether or not the game is successful, determines the display duration, and determines the type. The configuration may be such that commands are transmitted, and the transmission timing of these time commands and type commands may be shifted. However, the timing at which the time command and the type command are transmitted needs to be the timing until the symbol variation display is switched from the high-speed variation to the low-speed variation in the symbol display device 31.

  (56) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  Specifically, a main control device that performs a role lottery based on the operation of the start lever, an auxiliary display device that is provided separately from the reel device and performs an auxiliary effect, and command information transmitted from the main control device And a sub-control device that controls the display of the auxiliary display device based on the sub-control device, the auxiliary effect started based on the reception of the start command information transmitted from the main control device is the main control in the sub-control device It is configured so that it is terminated independently regardless of the command from the device. In this case, the sub control device determines the effect mode or display duration of the auxiliary effect based on the reception of the command information transmitted from the main control device, and specifies the end timing based on the determined information. Good.

  Further, in the case of the present configuration, the auxiliary effect is not limited to the configuration in which the auxiliary effect is started at the start of the game time in the reel device, and the auxiliary effect may be started in the middle of the game time. May be started. Furthermore, an auxiliary effect may be executed so as to straddle a plurality of game times. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which an auxiliary | presentation effect is performed in the mode for mismatch when a display mode cannot be determined from command information in a sub control apparatus. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which auxiliary | assistant effect is performed in the aspect for abnormality, when communication abnormality of command information generate | occur | produces. Further, the end trigger of the predetermined effect included in the auxiliary effect may be combined with the command information transferred to execute control different from the end control of the predetermined effect in the sub-control device.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately indicated in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration indicated in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. In addition to the display means (design display device 31) for displaying the variation of the picture, the first control means (main control device 60) and the second control means (sound lamp control device 90, display control device 100),
In a gaming machine in which the display unit is display-controlled by the second control unit so that the display of the variation of the pattern is performed based on the information transmitted from the first control unit.
The second control means includes
Based on the reception of the special command information (variation command) transmitted from the first control means, the special display including the variation display of the pattern is performed over the display continuation period corresponding to the special command information. A mode determining means for determining a display mode in the case (a function of executing the process of step S706 in the display-side MPU 102);
In the situation where the special display is being executed over the display continuation period, the design is made to wait in a predetermined standby area (standby areas SA1 to SA9) by causing the standby timing to be displayed. Later, based on the display mode determined by the mode determination unit, instead of based on the command from the first control unit, the end execution unit (finally performing the processing for changing in the display-side MPU 102) that displays the picture in a final stop state. Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine of feature A1, since the display means is controlled by the second control means so as to perform the variable display of the picture based on the information transmitted from the first control means, for example, processing for the first control means Load concentration is eased.

  In this case, the second control means determines a display mode corresponding to the received special command information based on the reception of the special command information, and further displays a picture in the standby area when the standby timing is reached in a situation where the special display is being executed. It is possible to make the final stop display of the pattern based on the determined display mode rather than based on the command from the first control unit after the standby display is performed. For example, the number of command information transmitted from the first control unit is reduced by not transmitting the confirmation command information for ending the special display from the first control unit, as compared with the configuration in which the confirmation command information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the first control means. Further, for example, when the confirmation command information is transmitted from the first control means, even if the confirmation command information is rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like during transmission and cannot be decoded by the second control means. The two control means can end the special display independently.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the display control is performed by the second control unit based on the command information transmitted from the first control unit, it is possible to make the display system suitable.

  Note that “the special command information transmitted from the first control means has been received” includes not only the configuration in which the special command information is directly received from the first control means, but also the first control means and the second control means. The configuration including the relay unit on the signal path includes a configuration for receiving the special command information transmitted from the first control unit and relayed by the relay unit.

  Further, the “first control means” is not limited to the configuration composed of a single control device, and may be composed of a plurality of control devices. Similarly, the “second control means” is a single control device. It is not limited to the structure which consists of control apparatuses, The structure which consists of a some control apparatus may be sufficient.

  Feature A2. The end execution means, when the picture is finally stopped and displayed, continues the state over a final stop period (stationary display period) and performs the continuous display control based on a command from the first control means. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the gaming machine is performed without being performed.

  According to the feature A2, when the picture is finally stopped and displayed, the state is continued for the last stop period, so that the player can easily recognize the type of the picture that is finally stopped and displayed. In this case, the second control means can perform the final stop display of the pattern over the final stop period without depending on the command from the first control means. For example, by not transmitting the command information for performing the display control from the first control unit, the number of command information transmitted from the first control unit is reduced as compared with the configuration in which the command information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the first control means. For example, when the command information is transmitted from the first control means, even if the command information is rewritten during the transmission due to noise or the like and cannot be decoded by the second control means, the second control The means can uniquely display the pattern for the final stop over the final stop period.

Feature A3. The mode determining means determines a display mode when the special display is performed over a display duration corresponding to the special command information, based on the reception of the special command information. Corresponding display mode information (address information of the mode information of the game times effect) is stored in the storage means (work RAM 104),
Further, the display mode information includes information on a mode in which the pattern is finally stopped and displayed over the final stop period,
The display execution information stored in the storage means is the display execution control for causing the picture to be finally stopped and displayed over the final stop period without depending on a command from the first control means. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the gaming machine is based on the above.

  According to the feature A3, the second control means can perform the display control based on the display mode information, so that the picture can be finally stopped and displayed over the final stop period. Therefore, the display control for performing the special display. The processing load during the execution of is reduced.

Feature A4. The second control means is a start waiting display execution means (display) for controlling the display means so that a start waiting display (display of a demo image) is performed after the timing when the final stop display of the pattern is finished. A function of executing the processing of step S610 and step S611 in the side MPU 102),
The start waiting display execution means includes means for starting the start waiting display (a function of executing the process of step S610 in the display side MPU 102) regardless of a command from the first control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3.

  According to the feature A4, since the start waiting display is performed after the timing when the final stop display of the pattern is ended, it is possible to prevent the state where the final stop display of the pattern is continued on the display unit more than necessary. It is done. In this case, the second control means can perform the start waiting display irrespective of a command from the first control means. For example, by not transmitting the command information for performing the display control from the first control unit, the number of command information transmitted from the first control unit is reduced as compared with the configuration in which the command information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the first control means. For example, when the command information is transmitted from the first control means, even if the command information is rewritten during the transmission due to noise or the like and cannot be decoded by the second control means, the second control The means can start the start waiting display independently.

Feature A5. The second control means performs display control of the display means so that a start waiting display (display of a demo image) is performed based on the fact that the start waiting period has elapsed after the final stop display of the pattern is ended. Start waiting display execution means (function to execute the processing of step S610 and step S611 in the display-side MPU 102),
The start wait display execution means includes measurement means (various counter areas 121) for measuring the start wait period, and the start wait period elapses after the measurement result of the measurement means is finished when the final stop display of the pattern is finished. Based on the measurement result corresponding to the above, the means for starting the start waiting display (function to execute the process of step S610 in the display side MPU 102) without depending on the command from the first control means The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein:

  According to the feature A5, since the start waiting display is performed based on the fact that the start waiting period has elapsed after the final stop display of the pattern is ended, the state in which the display is finally stopped and displayed on the display unit is more than necessary. It is suppressed that it continues. In this case, the second control means can perform the start waiting display irrespective of a command from the first control means. For example, by not transmitting the command information for performing the display control from the first control unit, the number of command information transmitted from the first control unit is reduced as compared with the configuration in which the command information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the first control means. For example, when the command information is transmitted from the first control means, even if the command information is rewritten during the transmission due to noise or the like and cannot be decoded by the second control means, the second control The means can start the start waiting display independently.

Feature A6. The first control means transmits the special command information or different start command information when starting the special display (the processing in step S201 and the processing in step S409 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60). And when the display continuation period corresponding to the command information transmitted by the transmission process executed earlier has not elapsed, the execution of the new transmission process is waited and the display continuation period has elapsed. The waiting transmission process is executed later,
The second control means includes a start execution means (a function for executing a change start process in the display-side MPU 102) that starts the special display based on reception of the command information transmitted by the transmission process,
In the start waiting period, after the display continuation period elapses in a state where the execution of the transmission process is waiting, the transmission process is executed by the first control unit, and the start process by the start execution unit is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature A5, wherein the gaming machine is set as a period longer than a period required for execution.

  According to the feature A6, in the configuration in which the start waiting display can be independently started in the second control means, the display is performed when the first control means waits for the transmission process in the situation where the special display is being executed. The possibility that a new special display is started immediately after the start waiting display is started by the means is reduced.

Feature A7. The second control means includes a start execution means (a function for executing a change start process in the display side MPU 102) for starting the special display based on the reception of the special command information.
The start execution unit starts the special display even when the display mode cannot be determined from the special command information in the mode determination unit. The features A1 to A6 are characterized in that The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A7, the special command information is used not only as information for determining the display mode but also as information serving as a trigger when starting the special display. As a result, the number of command information transmitted from the first control means can be reduced and the storage capacity required in the first control means can be reduced compared to a configuration in which command information having each function is transmitted individually. Is possible.

  Even if the special command information is rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like during transmission, special display can be performed. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature A1, the end timing of the special display can be uniquely specified by the second control means.

  Feature A8. If the display mode cannot be determined from the received special command information, the mode determination means determines that the display mode is a non-matching display mode in which the special display is performed over a non-matching duration. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, further comprising: a determining unit (function for executing the process of step S710 in the display-side MPU 102).

  According to the feature A8, even if the special command information is rewritten during the transmission due to the influence of noise or the like, the special display can be performed in the display mode for mismatch. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature A1, the end timing of the special display can be uniquely specified by the second control means.

  Instead of the configuration of the feature A8, “the second control unit specifies a unit for specifying that at least the content of the predetermined information included in the received special command information has been rewritten (step S702 in the display-side MPU 102). And the mode determining means, when the specifying means specifies that the content of at least the predetermined information included in the special command information has been rewritten, the display mode is A configuration may be applied in which a special display is provided with a non-coincidence determining means (a function for executing the process of step S710 in the display-side MPU 102) that determines a display mode for non-coincidence that is performed over a duration for non-coincidence.

  Feature A9. The termination execution means displays a predetermined mismatch stop result when the pattern is finally stopped and displayed in the special display corresponding to the mismatch display mode. Game machines.

  According to the feature A9, even when special display is performed in the mismatch mode, the stop result for mismatch can be displayed as a final stop. Assuming a configuration in which the content of the stop result is derived from special command information that has been rewritten due to noise or other factors during transmission, the information that caused the content of the stop result is also noise. In this case, for example, there is a concern that a stop result that should not be stopped is displayed as a final stop. On the other hand, since a predetermined stop result for inconsistency is displayed as a final stop, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature A10. The second control means stores a plurality of types of information on the display mode in advance so that the display duration includes different display modes.
When the display mode can be determined from the received special command information, the mode determination unit selects information on the display mode corresponding to the received special command information from the plurality of types of display mode information. Is what
The mismatch duration period is set as a period longer than the shortest display duration period among the display duration periods corresponding to the information of the plurality of types of display modes. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A10, when the special display is performed in the display mode for mismatching, it is possible to suppress the continuation period from becoming extremely short. Assuming a configuration in which the continuation period when the special display is performed in the disagreement display mode is extremely short, for example, the first control means displays the next special display until the display continuation period corresponding to the transmitted special command information elapses. When the command information for starting is not transmitted, there is a concern that the period from when the special display by the display mode for mismatching is ended until the next special display is started becomes longer than necessary. . On the other hand, according to the feature A10, occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature A11. The second control means stores a plurality of types of information on the display mode in advance so that the display duration includes different display modes.
When the display mode can be determined from the received special command information, the mode determination unit selects information on the display mode corresponding to the received special command information from the plurality of types of display mode information. Is what
One of the features A8 to A10, wherein the non-matching duration is set as a period longer than the longest display duration among the display durations corresponding to the information of the plurality of types of display modes. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A11, when the special display is performed in the display mode for inconsistency, it is possible to ensure a long duration.

  In the configuration of the feature A10 or the feature A11, for example, the non-coincidence duration may be any one of display durations corresponding to the information of the plurality of types of display modes. In this case, it is not necessary to prepare the discrepancy duration as dedicated information.

Feature A12. When the display mode can be determined from the received special command information, the mode determination unit stores information on the display duration corresponding to the special command information as a duration storage unit (counting area for game times 121a). To remember
The termination execution means is for causing the design to be finally stopped and displayed based on the information of the display continuation period stored in the continuation period storage means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A11, wherein the mismatch duration is an upper limit duration that can be stored in the duration storage means.

  According to the feature A12, when special display is performed in the display mode for inconsistency, information on the upper limit duration may be stored in the duration storage means, so that the process can be simplified.

Feature A13. The second control means is a start execution means for starting the special display when the start condition is established based on receiving the command information transmitted from the first control means (variation start processing in the display side MPU 102). Function to execute)
If the start condition is satisfied while the special display is being performed in the display mode for inconsistency, the start execution means stops the special display in the display mode for mismatch and responds to the establishment of the start condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A12, wherein the new special display is started.

  According to the feature A13, when the start condition is satisfied in the middle of the special display in the disagreement display mode, priority is given to the start of a new special display corresponding to the establishment of the start condition. Although the control means is about to start a new special display, the special display by the display mode for mismatch is prevented from being continued.

  Further, when the special display in the display mode for mismatch is performed, the display duration is not regular because it is performed over the mismatch duration that does not reflect the special command information. In this case, even if a situation in which the display mode cannot be determined from the special command information suddenly occurs due to priority given to the start of a new special display as described above, It can be suppressed that the special display related to the special command information transmitted to is greatly affected.

Feature A14. When the special display is performed based on the display mode determined from the special command information by the mode determination means, the initial variation display is continued over a predetermined period from the start timing,
The game machine according to Feature A13, wherein, when the special display is performed in the display mode for inconsistency, the second control means continues the initial variation display until a stage before the final stop. .

  According to the feature A14, even if the special display by the display mode for mismatching is stopped and a new special display is started, the state in which the initial variation display is performed on the display unit is easily continued. In this case, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the special display based on the display mode for inconsistency is a part of the subsequent special display, and the special display based on the display mode for mismatch is stopped and a new special display is started. If this happens, the possibility of giving the player a sense of incongruity is reduced.

Feature A15. The first control means transmits the special command information or different start command information when starting the special display (the processing in step S201 and the processing in step S409 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60). And when the display continuation period corresponding to the command information transmitted by the transmission process executed earlier has not elapsed, the execution of the new transmission process is waited and the display continuation period has elapsed. The waiting transmission process is executed later,
A display mode information storage unit (mode information storage area 112) that stores a plurality of types of information of the display mode in advance so that the display duration includes different display modes;
When the display mode can be determined from the received special command information, the mode determination unit selects information on the display mode corresponding to the received special command information from the plurality of types of display mode information. Is what
Furthermore, when the special display is performed based on the display mode determined from the special command information by the mode determination means, the initial variation display is continued over a predetermined period from the start timing,
When the second control means causes the special display to be performed in the display mode for mismatch, the initial variation display is performed from the longest display duration among the display durations corresponding to the plurality of types of display mode information. The gaming machine according to Feature A13, wherein the gaming machine is continued for a long period of time.

  According to the feature A15, even if the special display according to the display mode for inconsistency is stopped and a new special display is started, the state in which the initial variation display is performed on the display unit is easily continued. In this case, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the special display based on the display mode for inconsistency is a part of the subsequent special display, and the special display based on the display mode for mismatch is stopped and a new special display is started. If this happens, the possibility of giving the player a sense of incongruity is reduced.

  In particular, when special display is performed in the display mode for mismatching, the initial variation display is continued for a period longer than the longest display continuation period among the display continuation periods corresponding to a plurality of types of display mode information. Thereby, in the situation where special display is performed in the display mode for inconsistency, when the execution of transmission processing is waited by the first control means, the initial variation display is performed in the special display. It becomes easy to start a new special display.

  Feature A16. When the second control unit causes the special display to be performed in the display mode for inconsistency, the initial variation display is performed after the transmission process is performed by the longest display continuation period and the first control unit. The gaming machine according to feature A15, characterized in that the gaming machine is continued for a period longer than the sum required for the start process by the start execution means.

  According to the feature A16, when the first control means waits for execution of the transmission process in the situation where the special display is performed in the display mode for inconsistency, the initial variation display is performed in the special display. New special indications are surely started in certain situations.

Feature A17. As the display mode of the special display, a high discrimination display mode and a low discrimination display mode in which the distinctiveness of the pattern by appearance is relatively high and low are set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A14 to A16, wherein the initial variation display is performed in the low identification display mode.

  According to feature A17, when the special display in the display mode for mismatching is canceled and a new special display is started, the player cannot easily recognize the boundary between the two, so the special display in the display mode for mismatching is stopped. Thus, the possibility that the player feels uncomfortable when a new special display is started is reduced.

Feature A18. The end execution means is to continue the state over the final stop period when the picture is displayed as a final stop.
The start execution means, when the start condition is established in the middle of the special display in the display mode for mismatch, the stop result corresponding to the display mode for mismatch is finally stopped and the state is displayed The special display according to the feature A13, characterized in that the special display according to the display mode for mismatching is continued for the final stop period, and a new special display corresponding to the establishment of the start condition is started. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A18, even if the special display is stopped in the mismatch display mode, the stop result is displayed as the final stop, so that the player can easily recognize that one special display is ended.

  Feature A19. The end execution means corresponds to the special command information related to the special display when the start condition is satisfied during the special display in the display mode for inconsistency and the start condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Feature A18, wherein the gaming machine is terminated based on a lapse of a period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from a display continuation period.

  According to the feature A19, in the configuration in which the special display by the display mode for inconsistency is stopped by continuing the state in which the stop result is displayed in the final stop state over the final stop period, the temporal influence due thereto is It can be suppressed within the range of the following special indications.

  Feature A20. When the second control means receives the new display command information transmitted from the first control means while the special display is being performed in the mismatch display mode, the second control unit uses the mismatch display mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A19, wherein the special display is stopped and a new display corresponding to the command information is started.

  According to the feature A20, when the second control means receives new display command information while the special display is being performed in the mismatch display mode, the start of a new display corresponding to the command information Therefore, even if the first control means is about to start a new display, the special display by the display mode for mismatching is prevented from being continued.

  Further, when the special display in the display mode for mismatch is performed, the display duration is not regular because it is performed over the mismatch duration that does not reflect the special command information. In this case, even if a situation in which the display mode cannot be determined from the special command information suddenly occurs due to priority given to the start of a new display as described above, It can be suppressed that the display related to the transmitted command information is greatly affected.

Feature A21. The end execution means is to continue the state over the final stop period when the picture is displayed as a final stop.
When the second control means receives the start command information in the middle of the special display in the mismatch display mode, the second control means displays a stop result corresponding to the mismatch display mode in a final stop state The game according to Feature A20, wherein the display is continued for the last stop period, the special display in the display mode for inconsistency is stopped, and a new display corresponding to the command information is started. Machine.

  According to the feature A21, even if the special display is stopped in the display mode for inconsistency, the stop result is finally stopped and displayed, so that the player can easily recognize that one special display has ended.

Feature A22. The first control means includes
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S105 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to predetermined grant information (function of executing step S401 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) )When,
A privilege granting unit (main control device 60) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining unit that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 62 of
Information transmission means for transmitting the special command information (a function for executing the process of step S201 and the process of step S409 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) based on the determination of the grant made by the grant determination means. ,
With
When the special display is performed in the display mode corresponding to the special command information transmitted by performing the grant determination for the special information corresponding to the grant information, the grant correspondence stop result is displayed as a final stop by the pattern. Configuration
In the special display when the mode determination unit cannot determine the display mode from the special command information, the end execution unit is different from the addition corresponding stop result in the case where the pattern is displayed as a final stop. The gaming machine according to any one of features A7 to A21, characterized in that a stop result is displayed.

  Assuming a configuration in which the content of the stop result is derived from the special command information whose information has been rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like during transmission, the information that caused the content of the stop result is also It is assumed that it has been rewritten due to the influence, and in this case, for example, there is a concern that the result of giving stoppage will be displayed as a final stop. On the other hand, according to the feature A22, in the special display in the case where the display mode cannot be determined from the special command information, the stop result in a mode different from the assignment corresponding stop result is displayed. The occurrence of inconvenience can be suppressed.

  In addition, the display means is configured to perform variable display of a pattern in a plurality of variable display areas, and further, as a kind of display mode, the above-described assignment correspondence stop result can be established by performing standby display in some of the variable display areas. Includes reach fluctuation display that allows a reach line to be formed by establishing a unique reach pattern on the active line, and displays the change display of the pattern in the remaining change display area under the situation where the reach line is formed In the configuration, the end execution means, in the special display when the display mode cannot be determined from the special command information, in the case of the last stop display of the pattern, the grant corresponding stop result and the It is good also as a structure which displays the stop result of the aspect different from the stop result containing a reach picture.

  Feature A23. The second control means includes a start execution means (a function for executing a change start process in the display side MPU 102) for starting the special display based on the reception of the special command information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A22.

  According to the feature A23, the special command information is used not only as information for determining the display mode, but also as information serving as a trigger when starting the special display. As a result, the number of command information transmitted from the first control means can be reduced and the storage capacity required in the first control means can be reduced compared to a configuration in which command information having each function is transmitted individually. Is possible.

Feature A24. The first control means transmits the first special command information as the special command information, and transmits the second special command information (type command) simultaneously with or before the transmission of the first special command information. Is what
The second control means, based on the reception of the second special command information, stops picture determining means for determining the type of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed in the special display (the process of step S705 in the display-side MPU 102). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A23, which is provided with a function to be executed.

  According to the feature A24, the type of the picture that is finally stopped and displayed in the special display can be determined by the second control unit based on a command from the first control unit.

Feature A25. The first control means includes
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S105 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to predetermined grant information (function of executing step S401 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) )When,
A privilege granting unit (main control device 60) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining unit that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 62 of
Information transmission means for transmitting the special command information (a function for executing the process of step S201 and the process of step S409 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) based on the determination of the grant made by the grant determination means. ,
With
The second control means is based on receiving the special command information or receiving start command information transmitted from the first control means simultaneously with the special command information or at a different timing. Start execution means for starting the special display for game times (a function of executing processing for starting change in the display side MPU 102),
In the case where the display determination mode can be determined from the special command information in the mode determination unit, the termination execution unit displays the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination unit after the final stop display. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A24, characterized in that the special display for the game times is terminated.

  According to the feature A25, the special display of each game time is favorably performed in the second control means.

Feature A26. The first control means starts a game turning operation before the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means. The game turn operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the means, and the game turn of each game time is determined according to the special information acquired by the information acquisition means. Game time control means (function to execute game time control processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for controlling notifying means (main display unit 33) different from the display means so that the operation is performed,
The information transmission means continues the game-turning operation executed by the game-time control means for the special information subjected to the grant determination based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means. The gaming machine according to Feature A25, wherein the special command information corresponding to a period is transmitted.

  According to the feature A26, the result of the assignment determination is also notified in the notification unit based on the notification control by the first control unit. Further, since the special command information transmitted from the first control means corresponds to the duration of the game turn operation, the game turn operation of each game time in the notification means and the special game time action in the display means. The display can be linked.

Feature A27. The standby area includes a stop position when the standby picture is displayed as a final stop,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A26, wherein the standby display is a state in which a picture waiting in the standby area is performing a standby operation in the standby area.

  According to the feature A27, it becomes easy for the player to visually recognize how the picture is finally stopped and displayed from the state in which the design is displayed while waiting.

Feature A28. In addition to display means (symbol display device 31) for displaying the variation of the picture, it also includes first control means (main control device 60) and second control means (sound lamp control device 90, display control device 100),
In a gaming machine in which the display unit is display-controlled by the second control unit so that the display of the variation of the pattern is performed based on the information transmitted from the first control unit.
The second control means includes a special display including a variable display of the pattern over a display duration corresponding to the special command information based on the reception of the special command information transmitted from the first control means. Display control of the display means so that the display is performed, and in the situation where the special display is being executed, the standby timing is displayed by causing the pattern to wait in a predetermined standby area. A display execution means (a function for executing display control processing in the display-side MPU 102) is provided that causes the picture to be finally stopped and displayed to end the special display regardless of a command from the first control means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature A28, the display unit is controlled to be displayed by the second control unit based on the information transmitted from the first control unit, so that, for example, the display control is performed. Concentration is relaxed.

  In this case, the second control means causes the special display to be performed over the display continuation period corresponding to the special command information based on the reception of the special command information, and the special display is being executed. It is possible to perform display control that causes the design to wait for display in the standby area and display the display in standby after the standby timing is reached, regardless of a command from the first control means. It is. For example, the number of command information transmitted from the first control unit is reduced by not transmitting the confirmation command information for ending the special display from the first control unit, as compared with the configuration in which the confirmation command information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the first control means. Further, for example, when the confirmation command information is transmitted from the first control means, even if the confirmation command information is rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like during transmission and cannot be decoded by the second control means. The two control means can end the special display independently.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the display control is performed by the second control unit based on the command information transmitted from the first control unit, it is possible to make the display system suitable.

  Note that “the special command information transmitted from the first control means has been received” includes not only the configuration in which the special command information is directly received from the first control means, but also the first control means and the second control means. The configuration including the relay unit on the signal path includes a configuration for receiving the special command information transmitted from the first control unit and relayed by the relay unit.

  Further, the “first control means” is not limited to the configuration composed of a single control device, and may be composed of a plurality of control devices. Similarly, the “second control means” is a single control device. It is not limited to the structure which consists of control apparatuses, The structure which consists of a some control apparatus may be sufficient.

  Further, the configuration limited in any one of the features A2 to A27 may be applied to the feature A28. In this case, the synergistic effect by each structure can be show | played.

Feature A29. In addition to the display means (design display device 31) for displaying the variation of the picture, the first control means (main control device 60) and the second control means (sound lamp control device 90, display control device 100),
In a gaming machine in which the display unit is display-controlled by the second control unit so that the display of the variation of the pattern is performed based on the information transmitted from the first control unit.
The second control means includes
Based on the reception of the special command information (variation command) transmitted from the first control means, the special display including the variation display of the pattern is performed over the display continuation period corresponding to the special command information. A mode determining means for determining a display mode in the case (a function of executing the process of step S706 in the display-side MPU 102);
In the situation where the special display is being executed over the display continuation period, the design is made to wait in a predetermined standby area (standby areas SA1 to SA9) by causing the standby timing to be displayed. Later, based on the display mode determined by the mode determination unit, an end execution unit (a function for executing the processing for changing in the display-side MPU 102) for final stop display of the pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine of feature A29, the display means is controlled by the second control means so as to display the variation of the picture based on the information transmitted from the first control means. For example, the processing for the first control means Load concentration is eased.

  In this case, the second control means determines a display mode corresponding to the received special command information based on the reception of the special command information, and further displays a picture in the standby area when the standby timing is reached in a situation where the special display is being executed. It is possible to stop and display the picture based on the determined display mode after the standby display is performed. For example, the number of command information transmitted from the first control unit is reduced by not transmitting the confirmation command information for ending the special display from the first control unit, as compared with the configuration in which the confirmation command information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the first control means. Further, for example, when the confirmation command information is transmitted from the first control means, even if the confirmation command information is rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like during transmission and cannot be decoded by the second control means. The two control means can end the special display independently.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the display control is performed by the second control unit based on the command information transmitted from the first control unit, it is possible to make the display system suitable.

  Note that “the special command information transmitted from the first control means has been received” includes not only the configuration in which the special command information is directly received from the first control means, but also the first control means and the second control means. The configuration including the relay unit on the signal path includes a configuration for receiving the special command information transmitted from the first control unit and relayed by the relay unit.

  Further, the “first control means” is not limited to the configuration composed of a single control device, and may be composed of a plurality of control devices. Similarly, the “second control means” is a single control device. It is not limited to the structure which consists of control apparatuses, The structure which consists of a some control apparatus may be sufficient.

Feature A30. In addition to display means (symbol display device 31) for displaying the variation of the picture, it also includes first control means (main control device 60) and second control means (sound lamp control device 90, display control device 100),
In a gaming machine in which the display unit is display-controlled by the second control unit so that the display of the variation of the pattern is performed based on the information transmitted from the first control unit.
The second control means includes
Based on the reception of the special command information (variation command) transmitted from the first control means, the duration for determining the display continuation period of the special display including the variation display of the pattern based on the special command information Determining means (function of executing the process of step S703 in the display-side MPU 102);
In the situation where the special display is being executed over the display continuation period, the design is made to wait in a predetermined standby area (standby areas SA1 to SA9) by causing the standby timing to be displayed. Later, based on the display continuation period determined by the continuation period determining means, end execution means (a function for executing the processing for changing in the display-side MPU 102) for finally stopping and displaying the picture,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine of feature A30, the display means is controlled by the second control means so as to display the variation of the picture based on the information transmitted from the first control means. For example, the processing for the first control means Load concentration is eased.

  In this case, the second control means determines the display continuation period corresponding to the received special command information based on the reception of the special command information, and further, in the situation where the special display is being executed, the second control means displays the picture in the standby area. Can be displayed on standby based on the determined display continuation period. For example, the number of command information transmitted from the first control unit is reduced by not transmitting the confirmation command information for ending the special display from the first control unit, as compared with the configuration in which the confirmation command information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the first control means. Further, for example, when the confirmed command information is transmitted from the first control means, even if the confirmed command information is rewritten due to noise or the like during transmission and cannot be decoded by the second control means, The two control means can end the special display independently.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the display control is performed by the second control unit based on the command information transmitted from the first control unit, it is possible to make the display system suitable.

  Note that “the special command information transmitted from the first control means has been received” includes not only the configuration in which the special command information is directly received from the first control means, but also the first control means and the second control means. The configuration including the relay unit on the signal path includes a configuration for receiving the special command information transmitted from the first control unit and relayed by the relay unit.

  Further, the “first control means” is not limited to the configuration composed of a single control device, and may be composed of a plurality of control devices. Similarly, the “second control means” is a single control device. It is not limited to the structure which consists of control apparatuses, The structure which consists of a some control apparatus may be sufficient.

Feature A31. In addition to including display means (symbol display device 31), first control means (main control device 60) and second control means (sound lamp control device 90, display control device 100),
In the gaming machine in which the display unit is display-controlled by the second control unit so that a special display is performed based on the information transmitted from the first control unit.
The second control means includes
Based on the reception of the special command information (variation command) transmitted from the first control means, a display mode is determined when the special display is performed over a display duration corresponding to the special command information. Mode determining means (function for executing the processing of step S706 in the display-side MPU 102);
In the situation where the special display is being executed, when the end timing is specified based on the display mode determined by the mode determining means, and the end timing is specified, the special display is displayed. An end execution means for terminating (a function for executing the processing for change in the display-side MPU 102);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine of feature A31, the display means is controlled by the second control means based on the information transmitted from the first control means, so that the concentration of processing load on the first control means is alleviated, for example.

  In this case, the second control means determines a display mode corresponding to the received special command information based on the reception of the special command information, and further finishes based on the determined display mode in a situation where the special display is being executed. When it is specified that it is the end timing, the special display can be ended. For example, the number of command information transmitted from the first control unit is reduced by not transmitting the confirmation command information for ending the special display from the first control unit, as compared with the configuration in which the confirmation command information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the first control means. Further, for example, when the confirmation command information is transmitted from the first control means, even if the confirmation command information is rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like during transmission and cannot be decoded by the second control means. The two control means can end the special display independently.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the display control is performed by the second control unit based on the command information transmitted from the first control unit, it is possible to make the display system suitable.

  Note that “the special command information transmitted from the first control means has been received” includes not only the configuration in which the special command information is directly received from the first control means, but also the first control means and the second control means. The configuration including the relay unit on the signal path includes a configuration for receiving the special command information transmitted from the first control unit and relayed by the relay unit.

  Further, the “first control means” is not limited to the configuration composed of a single control device, and may be composed of a plurality of control devices. Similarly, the “second control means” is a single control device. It is not limited to the structure which consists of control apparatuses, The structure which consists of a some control apparatus may be sufficient.

Feature A32. In addition to including display means (symbol display device 31), first control means (main control device 60) and second control means (sound lamp control device 90, display control device 100),
In the gaming machine in which the display unit is display-controlled by the second control unit so that a special display is performed based on the information transmitted from the first control unit.
The second control means includes
Based on the reception of the special command information (variation command) transmitted from the first control means, the duration determination means (display-side MPU 102) determines the display duration of the special display based on the special command information. In step S703), and
In the situation where the special display is being executed, when the end timing is specified based on the display continuation period determined by the mode determining means, and the end timing is specified, the special display Ending execution means (a function of executing the processing for fluctuation in the display side MPU 102),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine of feature A32, the display means is controlled by the second control means based on the information transmitted from the first control means, so the concentration of processing load on the first control means is alleviated, for example.

  In this case, the second control means determines the display continuation period corresponding thereto based on the reception of the special command information, and further, based on the determined display continuation period in a situation where the special display is being executed. When the end timing is specified and the end timing is specified, the special display can be ended. For example, the number of command information transmitted from the first control unit is reduced by not transmitting the confirmation command information for ending the special display from the first control unit, as compared with the configuration in which the confirmation command information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the first control means. Further, for example, when the confirmation command information is transmitted from the first control means, even if the confirmation command information is rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like during transmission and cannot be decoded by the second control means. The two control means can end the special display independently.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the display control is performed by the second control unit based on the command information transmitted from the first control unit, it is possible to make the display system suitable.

  Note that “the special command information transmitted from the first control means has been received” includes not only the configuration in which the special command information is directly received from the first control means, but also the first control means and the second control means. The configuration including the relay unit on the signal path includes a configuration for receiving the special command information transmitted from the first control unit and relayed by the relay unit.

  Further, the “first control means” is not limited to the configuration composed of a single control device, and may be composed of a plurality of control devices. Similarly, the “second control means” is a single control device. It is not limited to the structure which consists of control apparatuses, The structure which consists of a some control apparatus may be sufficient.

  In addition, the configuration limited in any one of the features A2 to A27 may be applied to any one of the features A29 to A32. In this case, the synergistic effect by each structure can be show | played. Incidentally, in the application, each configuration may be applied in a state where the configuration “without depending on the command from the first control means” is not limited.

  In addition, a configuration limited by any one of the following features B1 to B20, the following features C1 to C18, and the following features D1 to D9 may be applied to any one of the above features A1 to A32. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. In addition to including display means (symbol display device 31), first control means (main control device 60) and second control means (sound lamp control device 90, display control device 100),
In the gaming machine in which the display unit is display-controlled by the second control unit so that a special display is performed based on the information transmitted from the first control unit.
The second control means includes
Special command information transmitted from the first control means (variation command in the first embodiment or the third embodiment, variation command, demonstration start command, opening command in the fourth embodiment) is received. Based on the above, execution means (a function for executing variation start processing in the display side MPU 102) for executing predetermined control,
A special display for terminating the special display as a control different from the predetermined control based on the reception of the special command information in a situation where the special display is performed. An ending unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S902 and S903 in the display-side MPU 102 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of steps S1409 and S1814 in the display-side MPU 102 in the third embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine of feature B1, the display means is controlled by the second control means based on the information transmitted from the first control means, so the concentration of processing load on the first control means is alleviated, for example. In this case, the command information that triggers the termination of the special display in the second control means is also used as the special command information that triggers the control different from the termination control. For example, the number of command information transmitted from the first control unit is reduced by not transmitting the confirmation command information for ending the special display from the first control unit, as compared with the configuration in which the confirmation command information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the first control means. Further, for example, when the confirmation command information is transmitted from the first control means, even if the confirmation command information is rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like during transmission and cannot be decoded by the second control means. The two control means can end the special display based on the reception of the special command information.

Feature B2. The second control means includes reading means for reading the received command information (function for executing command confirmation processing in the display-side MPU 102),
The special display ending means, when it is specified that the special command information has been received based on the reading result, even if the reading means has not completed reading the special command information. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the special display is terminated.

  According to the feature B2, the special display currently being executed is terminated based on the reception of the special command information before the reading of the special command information is completed. Thereby, based on the reception of the special command information, separately from the predetermined control, the control for causing the special display to be terminated in the configuration in which the special display currently being executed is terminated. It is possible to adopt a configuration that avoids simultaneous control of both while giving priority to the above.

  Feature B3. The special display ending unit is a part of the special command information (in the third embodiment, the upper byte) even when all the information of the special command information is not read by the reading unit. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the special display is terminated based on the fact that (information) is read by the reading means.

  According to the feature B3, the effect which demonstrated the said feature B2 can be show | played, utilizing the structure which concerns on the reading of special command information.

Feature B4. The command information includes specific command information in addition to the special command information, and the special command information enables the second control means to identify the special command information and the specific command information. Information (high-order byte information in the third embodiment) as part of the information,
The special display ending unit is configured to perform the special display based on the fact that the identifiable information is read by the reading unit even when all information of the special command information is not read by the reading unit. The gaming machine according to Feature B2 or B3, wherein the display is terminated.

  In order for the second control means to recognize the command information satisfactorily, it is preferable that the command information itself contains information that allows the second control means to recognize which type of command information is used. In this case, according to the feature B4, the function and effect described with respect to the feature B2 can be achieved while using the configuration that can recognize the command information satisfactorily.

  In place of the configuration of the feature B4, “the special command information includes information of a plurality of bits, and the identifiable information is information of some bits of the information of the plurality of bits. When the special command information is read, the reading means reads the information on the partial bits before reading the information on the specific bits different from the information on the partial bits. It is also possible to apply a configuration in which at least a specific period is required until the reading of the specific bit information is completed after the reading of the bit information is completed.

  Further, the special command information may include content information that is different from the identifiable information, and includes content information that makes the command content to the second control means different between the same type of special command information. In this case, the second control means can execute a predetermined control based on the reception of the special command information, and the content of the predetermined control according to the content information of the received special command information. Can be used.

Feature B5. The execution means executes display start means (starting step S1707, step S1711 and step S1715 in the display side MPU 102) for executing start control for starting the special display or a display different from the special display based on the reception of the special command information. Function to execute processing)
When the reading means reads the special command information, the reading means reads the information that can be identified before reading the specific information that is different from the information that can be identified (the lower byte information in the third embodiment). And at least a specific period from the completion of the reading of the identifiable information to the completion of the reading of the specific information,
The display start unit is configured to execute the start control based on completion of reading of at least the specific information in the special command information in the reading unit. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B5, the start control is executed based on the completion of reading of at least the specific information in the special command information, whereas the special display termination control currently being executed is Even if the reading of information is not completed. Thus, the special display is terminated in a configuration in which the special display currently being executed is controlled to be terminated separately from the predetermined start control based on the reception of the special command information. While giving priority to the control, a time interval can be generated between the special display related to the end and the subsequent display.

  Instead of the configuration of the feature B5, “the execution means includes display start means for executing start control for starting the special display or a display different from the special display based on the reception of the special command information. The display start unit may execute the start control based on the fact that all the information of the special command information is read by the reading unit.

Feature B6. The reading means executes a reading process each time it comes to a reading timing,
The special display end means executes a determination process for determining whether or not reading of the part of information is completed every time the determination timing is reached,
The determination timing is set as a timing that occurs between one reading timing and the next reading timing,
The reading means reads the partial information or less information in one processing time, and completes reading of one special command information by executing the reading processing in a plurality of processing times. The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B5, wherein:

  According to the feature B6, the effects described for the feature B3 or the feature B4 can be achieved by adjusting the relationship with the processing timing of various processes.

Feature B7. The reading means includes confirmation means for confirming the received command information (in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S1403 and S1411 in the display-side MPU 102), and a predetermined number of confirmation reference times. When the received command information is confirmed by the confirmation means over the period of time, the received command information has been read.
The special display ending unit is configured so that the confirmation by the confirmation unit for the special command information is a part of the number of confirmation reference times even when the reading unit has not completed reading the special command information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B6, wherein the special display is terminated based on completion.

  Since the command information reading is completed when the received command information is confirmed a plurality of times, the accuracy of reading the command information is improved. In this configuration, according to the feature B7, the function and effect described for the feature B2 can be achieved while using the configuration that improves the accuracy of reading the command information.

  Feature B8. The special display ending unit is configured such that even if the reading of the special command information is not completed by the reading unit, the confirmation unit confirms a part of the special command information by confirming the number of times of the confirmation reference. The gaming machine according to Feature B7, wherein the special display is terminated based on the completion of the number of times of copying.

  According to the feature B8, the special display is terminated in the configuration in which the special display currently being executed is terminated separately from the predetermined control based on the reception of the special command information. It is possible to lengthen the time interval from the execution of the control to be performed until the predetermined control is executed.

Feature B9. The execution means executes display start means (starting step S1707, step S1711 and step S1715 in the display side MPU 102) for executing start control for starting the special display or a display different from the special display based on the reception of the special command information. Function to execute processing)
The display start means executes the start control in the reading means based on completion of confirmation by the confirmation means for the special command information for the number of confirmation reference times. A gaming machine according to B7 or B8.

  According to the feature B9, the start control is executed based on the fact that the confirmation of the special command information is completed for the number of confirmation criteria, whereas the special display end control currently being executed is special. The confirmation of the command information is executed based on the completion of a part of the confirmation reference number of times. Thus, the special display is terminated in a configuration in which the special display currently being executed is controlled to be terminated separately from the predetermined start control based on the reception of the special command information. While giving priority to the control, a time interval can be generated between the special display related to the end and the subsequent display.

Feature B10. The confirmation unit executes a confirmation process every time the confirmation timing comes.
The special display ending unit executes a determination process for determining whether or not the confirmation by the confirmation unit is completed for the number of times at each determination timing.
The determination timing is set as a timing that occurs between one confirmation timing and the next confirmation timing,
The confirmation means performs confirmation once in one processing time, and completes confirmation of one special command information or a part of the information by executing the confirmation processing of the confirmation reference number of times. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B9.

  According to the feature B10, the effects described for the feature B7 can be achieved by adjusting the relationship with the processing timing of various processes.

Feature B11. The second control means includes receiving means (input port 151) for simultaneously receiving information from each of the plurality of unit paths, and is transmitted from the first control means when information is received by the receiving means. Command information received,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B10, wherein the reading unit reads the command information by reading each piece of information received by the receiving unit.

  According to the feature B11, in the configuration in which the command information is received based on the simultaneous reception of information from each of the plurality of unit paths, the excellent effect as described above can be achieved.

Feature B12. The second control means includes reception means for sequentially receiving unit information from the signal path, and the command information transmitted from the first control means is received by the reception means being received a plurality of times. Is to receive,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B10, wherein the reading unit reads the command information by reading each unit information received by the receiving unit.

  According to the feature B12, in the configuration in which the command information is received based on the sequential reception of the unit information from the signal path, the excellent effect as described above can be obtained.

  Feature B13. Any of the features B1 to B12, wherein the special command information is command information transmitted when a predetermined display is started by the display means after the special display is performed once. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature B13, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above by using the command information for starting the predetermined display after the special display is performed once.

Feature B14. A plurality of types of display to be performed after the special display is performed once are set, and first special command information (variation command) is individually associated with the plurality of types of display as the special command information. And second special command information (demonstration start command) are set,
The special display ending means is configured to end the special display being performed based on the reception of the first special command information in a situation where the special display is performed, and The special display being performed is terminated based on reception of the second special command information in a situation where the display is performed. The feature B13 is characterized in that Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B14, there is an effect that the special command information is also used as the command information for ending the special display even when there are a plurality of types of display performed after the special display is performed once. Can do.

Feature B15. The second control means includes reading means for reading the received command information (function for executing command confirmation processing of the display side MPU 102 in the fourth embodiment),
Both the first special command information and the second special command information have common identification information as a part of information,
The special display ending unit has read the common identification information by the reading unit even when all the information of the first special command information or the second special command information is not read by the reading unit. The gaming machine according to Feature B14, wherein the special display is terminated based on the above.

  According to the feature B15, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of special command information is used as command information that triggers the termination of the special display, even if any special command information is used as a trigger to terminate the special display, Since it is sufficient to read the identification information, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the configuration related to the information reading.

  Feature B16. The execution means is a special display start means (display side) for starting a special display corresponding to the received special command information as the predetermined control based on the reception of the special command information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B15, which includes a function of executing the processing of step S1707, step S1711, and step S1715 in the MPU.

  According to the feature B16, the command information necessary to start a new special display can be used as command information that triggers the termination of the special display that has already been executed.

Feature B17. The execution means includes
Based on the reception of the special command information, the mode determination means for determining the display mode when the special display is performed over the display continuation period corresponding to the received information (the process of step S706 in the display-side MPU 102) Function to execute)
Special display execution means (a function for executing processing during change in the display-side MPU 102) for controlling display of the display means so that special display corresponding to the display mode determined by the mode determination means is performed;
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B15, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B17, the command information necessary to start a new special display can be used as the command information that triggers the termination of the special display that has already been executed.

  In addition, by applying any one of the features B2 to B10 to the feature B16 or the feature B17, it takes time from the end of one special display to the start of the next special display. It is possible to generate a general interval.

Feature B18. The display means is to display a variation of the pattern, and the special display includes the variation display of the pattern,
The second control means may serve as the execution means or separately from the execution means.
A mode determining unit that determines a display mode when the special display is performed over a display continuation period corresponding to the received command information, based on reception of the command information transmitted from the first control unit. The function of executing the processing of step S706 in the display-side MPU 102),
A special standby area corresponding to the display mode determined by the mode determining unit is started and a standby area (predetermined by a standby timing in a situation where the special display is executed over the display continuation period) ( Instead of based on a command from the first control means, after waiting the picture in the standby areas SA1 to SA9) and performing a standby display, based on the display mode determined by the mode determination unit, A special display execution means (a function for executing the processing for changing in the display-side MPU 102) for finally stopping and displaying the picture;
With
The special display executing means starts the special display even when the display determining means cannot determine the display form from the special command information in the aspect determining means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature B18, the second control unit determines a display mode corresponding to the command information transmitted from the first control unit, and further waits in a situation where the special display is performed. In this way, after the design is made to wait in the standby area and the standby display is performed, the design is finally stopped and displayed based on the determined display mode, not based on the command from the first control means. Is possible. For example, the number of command information transmitted from the first control unit is reduced by not transmitting the confirmation command information for ending the special display from the first control unit, as compared with the configuration in which the confirmation command information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the first control means. Further, for example, when the confirmation command information is transmitted from the first control means, even if the confirmation command information is rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like during transmission and cannot be decoded by the second control means. The two control means can end the special display independently.

  Even if the command information necessary for starting the special display is rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like during the transmission, the special display can be performed. In this case, by providing the above-described configuration, the end timing of the special display can be uniquely specified by the second control means.

  However, when the command information necessary for starting the special display is rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like during the transmission, the special display started based on the command information is the display continuation period grasped by the first control means. Is assumed to be longer. Then, it is assumed that, for example, command information for starting a new display is transmitted from the first control means, even though the special display is still being executed. On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature B1, the command information can also be used as command information that triggers the termination of the special display, and display control can be performed satisfactorily.

  Feature B19. The special display end means is configured to end the special display in a state where a predetermined result is displayed based on the reception of the special command information in a situation where the special display is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B18, wherein:

  According to feature B19, even if the special display is terminated based on the reception of the special command information, the special display is terminated in a state where the predetermined result is displayed. Become easier to recognize.

Feature B20. In addition to including display means (symbol display device 31), first control means (main control device 60) and second control means (sound lamp control device 90, display control device 100),
In the gaming machine in which the display unit is display-controlled by the second control unit so that a special display is performed based on the information transmitted from the first control unit.
The second control means includes
Based on the reception of the special command information (variation command in the third embodiment, variation command, demonstration start command, opening command in the fourth embodiment) transmitted from the first control means, Display start means (function for executing processing for starting change in the display side MPU 102) for executing start control for starting special display or display different from the special display;
Result display means for displaying the display result of the special display currently being performed based on the reception of the special command information or the display result of the special display completed before the reception timing ( The function of executing the processing of step S1409 and step S1814 in the display-side MPU 102),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine of feature B20, the display means is controlled by the second control means based on the information transmitted from the first control means, so the concentration of processing load on the first control means is alleviated, for example. In this case, when a new display is started by the display means, the display result of the special display currently being performed or the display result of the special display that has been completed before is displayed. Thereby, it becomes possible to set many opportunities to confirm the display result of the special display.

  Note that “the command information transmitted from the first control means has been received” includes not only a configuration in which the command information is directly received from the first control means, but also a signal path between the first control means and the second control means. The configuration having the relay means above also includes a configuration for receiving the command information transmitted from the first control means and relayed by the relay means.

  Further, the “first control means” is not limited to the configuration composed of a single control device, and may be composed of a plurality of control devices. Similarly, the “second control means” is a single control device. It is not limited to the structure which consists of control apparatuses, The structure which consists of a some control apparatus may be sufficient.

  Moreover, you may apply the structure limited in any one of the said characteristics A1-A32, the following characteristics C1-C18, and the following characteristics D1-D9 with respect to the structure of any one of the said characteristics B1-B20. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. In addition to including display means (symbol display device 31), first control means (main control device 60) and second control means (sound lamp control device 90, display control device 100),
In the gaming machine in which the display unit is display-controlled by the second control unit so that a special display is performed based on the information transmitted from the first control unit.
The second control means includes
Based on the reception of the command information (variation command) transmitted from the first control means, the normal execution means (the first execution means) that causes the display means to execute a special display corresponding to the received command information. In the embodiment, the function of displaying and controlling the game turning effect started based on the execution of the processes in steps S703 to S706, and in the third embodiment, the function is started based on the execution of the process in step S1707. A function to control the effect for game times), and
When it is specified that it is necessary to start the special display in a situation where the command information transmitted from the first control means for receiving the special display is not normally received, for abnormal use Abnormal execution means for causing the display means to execute a corresponding special display (in the first embodiment, the function of controlling the display of the game turn effect started based on the execution of the processing in steps S708 to S710, In the third embodiment, a function for controlling a game-turning effect started based on the execution of the processing of step S1709 to step S1711 or step S1713 to step S1715);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine having the feature C1, since the display unit is controlled by the second control unit based on the information transmitted from the first control unit, for example, the concentration of processing load on the first control unit is reduced.

  In this case, the second control means that it is necessary to start the special display even in the situation where the command information transmitted from the first control means for performing the special display is not normally received. If specified, special display is performed by the display means. As a result, the special display is not performed at all on the display means due to a communication abnormality between the first control means and the second control means, even though it is originally necessary to start the special display. Such an inconvenience can be suppressed.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to the feature C1, wherein the abnormality execution means displays a predetermined abnormality display result when the special display is terminated.

  According to the feature C2, it is possible to display the abnormality display result even when the special display based on the control by the abnormality execution unit is performed. Also, assuming a configuration in which the contents of the display result are derived from the command information whose information has been rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like during transmission, the information that caused the content of the display result is also noise or the like In this case, for example, there is a concern that a display result that should not be stopped is displayed as a final stop. On the other hand, since a predetermined abnormality display result is displayed, occurrence of the inconvenience as described above can be suppressed.

Feature C3. The first control means includes
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S105 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to predetermined grant information (function of executing step S401 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) )When,
A privilege granting unit (main control device 60) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining unit that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 62 of
An information transmitting means (a function of executing the process of step S201 and the process of step S409 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) based on the determination of the grant made by the grant determination means;
With
When the special display is performed in the display mode corresponding to the command information transmitted by performing the grant determination for the special information corresponding to the grant information, the grant correspondence result is displayed.
The gaming machine according to the feature C2, wherein the abnormality execution means is configured to display a stop result in a mode different from the assignment correspondence result as the abnormality display result.

  Assuming a configuration in which the content of the display result is derived from the command information whose information has been rewritten due to the influence of noise, etc. during transmission, the information that caused the display result is also affected by the noise, etc. In this case, for example, there is a concern that an assignment correspondence result may be displayed. On the other hand, according to the feature C3, the special display for abnormality executed when there is a possibility that communication abnormality between the first control unit and the second control unit has occurred, Since the display results of different modes are displayed, the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above can be suppressed.

  In addition, the display means is configured to perform variable display of a pattern in a plurality of variable display areas, and further, as a kind of display mode, the above-described assignment correspondence stop result can be established by performing standby display in some of the variable display areas. Includes reach fluctuation display that allows a reach line to be formed by establishing a unique reach pattern on the active line, and displays the change display of the pattern in the remaining change display area under the situation where the reach line is formed In the configuration described above, the abnormality execution unit may display a display result in a mode different from the display result including the assignment correspondence result and the reach pattern as the abnormality display result. .

  Feature C4. The abnormality execution means determines that the display mode is the abnormality mode when it is specified that the special display needs to be started (in the first embodiment, executes the process of step S710). A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, which is provided with a function, a function of executing the processing of step S1711 or step S1715 in the third embodiment.

  Assuming a configuration in which the display mode is derived from the command information whose information has been rewritten due to the influence of noise during transmission, the information that caused the display mode to be derived is also rewritten due to the influence of noise. In this case, for example, there is a concern that special display may be performed in a display mode that should not be displayed. On the other hand, since special display is performed in a predetermined abnormality mode, occurrence of the inconvenience as described above can be suppressed.

Feature C5. The normal execution means, when causing the special display, to continue the initial display over a predetermined period from its start timing,
The game according to Feature C4, wherein the abnormality execution means is configured to continue the initial display until a stage before the special display is terminated when the special display corresponding to the abnormality is performed. Machine.

  According to the feature C5, even when the special display related to the communication abnormality of the command information is stopped and a new special display is started, the state where the initial display is performed on the display unit is easily continued. In this case, the player can easily recognize that the special display related to the communication abnormality in the command information is a part of the subsequent special display, and when the special display is canceled and a new special display is started. The possibility that the player feels uncomfortable is reduced.

Feature C6. The first control means executes a transmission process for transmitting the command information when starting the special display, and a display continuation period corresponding to the command information transmitted by the transmission process executed earlier has elapsed. If not, it waits for the execution of a new transmission process and executes the waiting transmission process after the display duration has elapsed,
A display mode information storage unit (mode information storage area 112) that stores a plurality of types of information of the display mode in advance so that the display duration includes different display modes;
When the normal execution means can determine the display mode from the received command information, the normal execution means selects information of the display mode corresponding to the received command information from the information of the plurality of types of display modes. Further, when the special display is performed based on the selected display mode, the initial display is continued for a predetermined period from the start timing,
In the case where the abnormality execution unit performs a special display corresponding to the abnormality, the initial display is longer than the longest display continuation period among the display continuation periods corresponding to the plurality of types of display mode information. The gaming machine according to Feature C5, wherein the gaming machine is continued for a period of time.

  According to the feature C6, even if the special display related to the abnormal reception of the command information is stopped and a new special display is started, the state where the initial display is performed on the display unit is easily continued. In this case, the player can easily recognize that the special display related to the communication abnormality in the command information is a part of the subsequent special display, and when the special display is canceled and a new special display is started. The possibility that the player feels uncomfortable is reduced.

  In particular, when special display related to communication abnormality of command information is performed, initial display is continued for a period longer than the longest display continuation period among display continuation periods corresponding to a plurality of types of display mode information. . Thereby, when the execution of the transmission process is awaited by the first control means in the situation where the special display relating to the communication abnormality of the command information is performed, the initial display is performed in the special display It becomes easy to start a new special display at.

Feature C7. The display means is for displaying the variation of the pattern,
The normal execution means waits for the pattern in a standby area that is set in advance in a situation where the display of the variation of the pattern is being performed, and the pattern is displayed after the standby is performed. The special display is performed so that the final stop is displayed.
The abnormality execution means is configured so that a ratio of a period during which the standby display is performed in one special display is larger than that in the case where the special display is performed by control of the normal execution means. The gaming machine according to Feature C4, characterized in that a special display is performed.

  According to the feature C7, even when the special display related to the communication abnormality of the command information is stopped and a new special display is started, the standby display is executed in the special display related to the communication abnormality of the command information It becomes easy to start a new special display at. In this case, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the two special displays have been digested, and the possibility that the player who is paying attention to the number of times the special display has been executed will be reduced.

Feature C8. The normal execution means includes:
A mode determining unit that determines a display mode when the special display is performed over a display continuation period corresponding to the received command information, based on reception of the command information transmitted from the first control unit. The function of executing the processing of step S706 in the display-side MPU 102),
Special display execution means (a function for executing processing during change in the display-side MPU 102) for controlling display of the display means so that special display corresponding to the display mode determined by the mode determination means is performed;
With
The abnormality executing means determines that the special display needs to be started even when the display determining means cannot be determined from the command information in the aspect determining means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein the display unit executes a special display corresponding to.

  According to the feature C8, when the second control means specifies that the special display needs to be started even if the display mode of the special display cannot be determined from the received command information, the display means Special display corresponding to the abnormal use is performed. As a result, the special display is completely displayed on the display means because the display mode cannot be determined from the command information in the second control means in spite of the situation that the special display needs to be started. Occurrence of inconvenience such as not being performed can be suppressed.

Feature C9. The second control means stores a plurality of types of information on the display mode in advance so that the display duration includes different display modes.
When the display mode can be determined from the received command information, the mode determination unit selects information on the display mode corresponding to the received command information from the plurality of types of display mode information. And
The display duration for special display corresponding to the abnormal use is set as a period longer than the shortest display duration among the display durations corresponding to the information of the plurality of types of display modes. A gaming machine according to Feature C8.

  According to the feature C9, when the special display is performed in the abnormal mode, it is possible to suppress the duration from becoming extremely short. Assuming a configuration in which the continuation period when the special display is performed in the abnormal mode is extremely short, for example, the first control unit starts the next special display until the display continuation period corresponding to the transmitted command information elapses. If the command information is not transmitted, there is a concern that the period from when the special display according to the abnormal mode is ended until the next special display is started becomes longer than necessary. On the other hand, according to the feature C9, such inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature C10. The second control means stores a plurality of types of information on the display mode in advance so that the display duration includes different display modes.
When the display mode can be determined from the received command information, the mode determination unit selects information on the display mode corresponding to the received command information from the plurality of types of display mode information. And
The display duration for special display corresponding to the abnormality is set as a period longer than the longest display duration among the display durations corresponding to the information of the plurality of types of display modes. A gaming machine according to feature C8 or C9.

  According to the feature C10, when special display is performed in an abnormal mode, it is possible to ensure a long duration.

  In the configuration of the feature C9 or the feature C10, for example, the abnormal display continuation period may be any one of display continuation periods corresponding to the information of the plurality of types of display modes. In this case, there is no need to prepare an abnormal display duration as dedicated information.

Feature C11. When the display mode can be determined from the received command information, the mode determination unit stores information on the display duration corresponding to the command information in a duration storage unit (game counter area 121a). It is what
The normal execution means displays the display result of the special display based on the information of the display continuation period stored in the continuation period storage means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C8 to C10, wherein the display duration of the special display corresponding to the abnormality is an upper limit duration that can be stored in the duration storage means.

  According to the feature C11, when the special display is performed in the abnormal mode, the information on the upper limit duration may be stored in the duration storage unit, and thus the process can be simplified.

  Feature C12. The abnormality execution unit executes the special display from the received command information even when the command information transmitted from the first control unit for receiving the special display is not normally received. When the display continuation period is specified, the display means executes the special display corresponding to the specified display continuation period as the special display corresponding to the abnormality (the process of step S1709 in the display-side MPU 102). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine has a function to be executed.

  According to the feature C12, even if the special display related to the reception abnormality of the command information is performed, the display continuation period in which the special display is performed is determined by the first control unit. You can have more opportunities to match.

  Feature C13. The second control means may be in a situation where the special display is being executed when a start condition is established based on reception of new display command information transmitted from the first control means. And a start execution means for canceling the special display being executed and starting a new display corresponding to the establishment of the start condition (a function for executing a change start process in the display-side MPU 102). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C12.

  Since the special display relating to the reception abnormality of the command information is executed when any abnormality occurs regarding the reception of the command information, the display continuation period is the display continuation period grasped by the first control means. It is assumed that they are different. In this case, according to the feature C13, when the start condition is satisfied during the special display, priority is given to the start of a new display corresponding to the satisfaction of the start condition. This prevents the special display related to the abnormal reception of the command information from being continued even though the first control means is about to start a new display.

Feature C14. The second control means includes
When ending the special display, an end execution means (function for executing the process of step S902 in the display side MPU 102) for continuing the display result over the final display period;
When the start condition is satisfied in the middle of the special display, a newly started display is obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the display continuation period corresponding to the command information related to the display. An adjusting unit (a function for executing the process of step S904 in the display-side MPU 102) to be ended based on the elapsed time;
The gaming machine according to Feature C13, comprising:

  According to the feature C14, in the configuration in which the special display relating to the reception abnormality of the command information is stopped while the display result is continued over the final display period, the temporal influence due thereto is changed to the next display range. Can be suppressed within.

Feature C15. The first control means includes
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S105 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Information determining means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquiring means corresponds to predetermined information (function for executing the process of step S401 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
Based on the determination by the information determination means, information transmission means for transmitting command information corresponding to the determination result (function to execute the processing of step S201 and the processing of step S409 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) )When,
With
The abnormality execution means receives a reception abnormality period (a first start abnormality period or a first abnormality period) from a predetermined timing when the command information is not received even though the special information is acquired by the information acquisition means. 2, the display unit executes a special display corresponding to the abnormality, based on the fact that the display unit has continued for 2 start abnormal periods). Gaming machine.

  Although the special information is acquired in the first control means, it is assumed that the special display is not started because the command information is not received in the second control means. In this case, the player may recognize that the special information has been invalidated even though it has been acquired. On the other hand, according to the feature C15, since the special display is executed based on the fact that the above situation has continued over the abnormal reception period, the possibility that the player will recognize as described above is reduced. The

For the configuration of the feature C15,
"The first control means includes an acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 64a) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers, with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
The information determination unit performs the determination on the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit, the plurality of special information The above determinations are made sequentially with respect to
Further, the first control means transmits number recognition information, which is information used when the second control means grasps the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Transmission means (function to execute the processing of step S201, step S1106 and step S1204 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60),
The abnormality execution means determines whether or not the special information has been acquired by the information acquisition means based on the received number recognition information. ''
The configuration may be applied. In this case, it is possible to satisfactorily recognize the presence or absence of special information in the second control means.

  Further, “the abnormality execution means can start the special display after the previous display on the display means is ended, even though the special information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Based on the establishment of the condition based on the fact that the condition has been satisfied, the display means executes a special display corresponding to the abnormality based on the fact that the situation in which the command information is not received continues for the reception abnormality period. It is good also as a structure.

  Further, “the abnormality execution unit does not receive the command information from the establishment of a condition based on the acquisition of the special information by the information acquisition unit in a situation where the special display can be newly started. A configuration may be adopted in which a special display corresponding to the abnormality is executed by the display means based on the situation continuing over the reception abnormality period.

  Feature C16. The abnormality execution means has received the command information from when the command information transmitted from the first control means is received to cause the special display until a predetermined reception condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C15, wherein the display unit executes a special display corresponding to the abnormality.

  According to the feature C16, when the command information is received from when the command information transmitted from the first control means for performing the special display is received until a predetermined reception condition is satisfied, any communication is performed. An abnormality may have occurred. In this case, if the special display corresponding to the command information related to the communication abnormality is executed as it is, there may be a problem, but according to this configuration, the special display corresponding to the abnormality is used in such a situation. Since this is executed, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature C17. The first control means is a measuring means for measuring a display continuation period when the special display is performed (a function for updating the counter continuation counter area in the various counter areas 64b and the counter area in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). ), And when the measurement of the display continuation period by the measurement means is completed, command information for causing the special display to be newly transmitted,
The abnormality execution means has received the command information transmitted from the first control means for performing the special display in a situation where the special display relating to the control of the normal execution means is being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C16, wherein a special display corresponding to the abnormality is executed by the display unit based on the above.

  According to the feature C17, when the command information transmitted from the first control means for performing the special display is received in a situation where the normal special display is being executed, there is a possibility that some communication abnormality has occurred. There is. In this case, if the special display corresponding to the command information related to the communication abnormality is executed as it is, there may be a problem, but according to this configuration, the special display corresponding to the abnormality is used in such a situation. Since this is executed, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature C18. The second control means includes
Execution means for executing predetermined control based on the reception of the special command information transmitted from the first control means (function for executing variation start processing in the display-side MPU 102);
A special display for terminating the special display as a control different from the predetermined control based on the reception of the special command information in a situation where the special display is performed. An ending unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S902 and S903 in the display-side MPU 102 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of steps S1409 and S1814 in the display-side MPU 102 in the third embodiment);
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C17, comprising:

  According to the feature C18, the command information that triggers the end of the special display in the second control means is also used as the special command information that triggers the control different from the control of the end. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the type of command information transmitted from the first control means to the second control means.

  Note that “the command information transmitted from the first control means has been received” includes not only a configuration in which the command information is directly received from the first control means, but also a signal path between the first control means and the second control means. The configuration having the relay means above also includes a configuration for receiving the command information transmitted from the first control means and relayed by the relay means.

  Further, the “first control means” is not limited to the configuration composed of a single control device, and may be composed of a plurality of control devices. Similarly, the “second control means” is a single control device. It is not limited to the structure which consists of control apparatuses, The structure which consists of a some control apparatus may be sufficient.

  Moreover, you may apply the structure limited in any one of the said characteristics A1-A32, the said characteristics B1-B20, and the following characteristics D1-D9 with respect to the structure of any one of the said characteristics C1-C18. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. In addition to including display means (symbol display device 31), first control means (main control device 60) and second control means (sound lamp control device 90, display control device 100),
Based on the information transmitted from the first control means, the display means is controlled by the second control means so that a special display is performed,
The first control means includes
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S105 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 64a) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, Information determination means for sequentially performing the determination for a plurality of special information (function to execute the process of step S401 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
Number recognition information transmitting means (MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for transmitting number recognition information which is information used when the second control means grasps the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In step S201, step S1106 and step S1204)
With
The second control means includes
Based on the reception of the number recognition information, special information number grasping means for grasping the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means (the processing of steps S1602 and S1604 in the display-side MPU 102 is executed) Function)
Based on the grasp result of the special information number grasping means, notification executing means (function for controlling display of the hold display area Ga in the display side MPU 102) for notifying the number of the special information on the display means;
Even in a situation where the number of the special information grasped by the special information number grasping means is 1 or more, the special execution information of the special information by the notification executing means is based on the fact that a predetermined stop condition is established. Notification canceling means (a function of executing the process of step S1606 in the display-side MPU 102) for canceling the notification of the number;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine having the feature D1, since the display unit is controlled by the second control unit based on the information transmitted from the first control unit, for example, the concentration of processing load on the first control unit is reduced. Further, since the number of special information acquired is notified on the display means, the player can easily grasp the number of special information acquired.

  In this case, since the notification of the number of acquired special information is stopped based on the establishment of a predetermined stop condition, for example, communication between the first control means and the second control means The occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed when there is a possibility that an inconvenience may occur if the notification of the number of special information is continued as in the case where some abnormality occurs.

Feature D2. In addition to including display means (symbol display device 31), first control means (main control device 60) and second control means (sound lamp control device 90, display control device 100),
Based on the information transmitted from the first control means, the display means is controlled by the second control means so that a special display is performed,
The first control means includes
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S105 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 64a) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, Information determination means for sequentially performing the determination for a plurality of special information (function to execute the process of step S401 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
Based on the determination by the information determination means, information transmission means for transmitting command information corresponding to the determination result (function to execute the processing of step S201 and the processing of step S409 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) )When,
Number recognition information transmitting means (MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for transmitting number recognition information which is information used when the second control means grasps the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In step S201, step S1106 and step S1204)
With
The second control means includes
Based on the reception of the command information, special display execution means for executing special display corresponding to the received command information on the display means (execution of variation start processing and variation processing in the display-side MPU 102 is executed) Function)
Based on the reception of the number recognition information, special information number grasping means for grasping the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means (the processing of steps S1602 and S1604 in the display-side MPU 102 is executed) Function)
Based on the grasp result of the special information number grasping means, a notification executing means for notifying the number of the special information on the display means or a display means different from the display information (function to display control the hold display area Ga in the display side MPU 102) When,
Even if the number of the special information grasped by the special information number grasping means is 1 or more, the notification is performed based on the fact that a predetermined stop condition is established after the execution of the special display. Notification stopping means (function for executing the processing of step S1606 in the display-side MPU 102) for stopping notification of the number of special information by the execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine of feature D2, the display means is controlled by the second control means based on the information transmitted from the first control means, so that, for example, the concentration of processing load on the first control means is reduced. Further, since the number of special information acquired is notified on the display means, the player can easily grasp the number of special information acquired.

  In this case, since the notification of the number of acquired special information is stopped based on the fact that a predetermined stop condition is satisfied after execution of the special display, for example, the first control means and the second control means When there is a possibility that inconvenience may occur if notification of the number of special information is continued, as in the case where some abnormality has occurred with respect to communication of command information between the two, the occurrence of the inconvenience is suppressed.

  Feature D3. The notification canceling means is based on the fact that the command information is not received until the stop condition is satisfied in a situation where the number of the special information grasped by the special information number grasping means is 1 or more. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the notification of the number of the special information by the execution means is stopped.

  When a communication error occurs in the command information, the number of special information that is notified based on the control of the notification execution means is reduced and the state continues even though the special display is not executed on the display means. It is assumed that In this case, the player may recognize that a part of the special information has been invalidated. On the other hand, according to the feature D3, since the notification of the number of special information based on the control of the notification execution unit is stopped in the above situation, the above inconvenience hardly occurs.

  Feature D4. The notification stopping means newly displays the special display after the previous display on the display means is ended, even though the number of the special information grasped by the special information number grasping means is 1 or more. From the establishment of the condition based on the fact that it is possible to start, based on the fact that the situation in which the command information is not received continues for a reception abnormality period, the establishment of the cancellation condition is performed by the notification execution unit. The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein notification of the number of special information is stopped.

  According to the feature D4, it is possible to cancel the notification of the number of special information based on the control of the notification execution unit in a situation where there is a high possibility that a communication abnormality of the command information has occurred.

  Feature D5. The notification stopping means does not receive the command information from the establishment of a condition based on reception of the number recognition information corresponding to the new acquisition of the special information in a situation where the special display can be newly started. As described in the feature D3 or D4, the notification execution means stops the notification of the number of the special information based on the fact that the stop condition is satisfied based on the fact that the notification is continued over the abnormal reception period. Game machines.

  According to the feature D5, it is possible to cancel the notification of the number of special information based on the control of the notification execution unit in a situation where there is a high possibility that a communication abnormality of the command information has occurred.

Feature D6. The first control unit is a period determination unit (of the main control device 60) that determines a display continuation period of the special display related to the special information that is the determination target by the information determination unit based on the determination result by the information determination unit. A function of executing the process of step S408 in the MPU 62).
In the situation where the measurement of the display continuation period determined by the period determination unit is not completed, the information determination unit does not newly perform the determination.
The special information number grasping means grasps based on receiving the command information or based on receiving the number recognition information transmitted based on the determination made by the information determining means. Updating the special information to reduce the number of the special information,
The notification stopping unit is configured to execute the special information from the execution of the special display until the number of the special information grasped by the special information number grasping unit is updated. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D5, characterized in that the number of notifications is stopped.

  According to the feature D6, the notification is stopped before the number of special information notified based on the control of the notification execution unit decreases. As a result, the number of special information that is notified based on the control of the notification execution means is reduced despite the situation in which the special display cannot be started due to a communication abnormality in the command information. It becomes difficult to occur. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that a part of the special information has been invalidated.

  Feature D7. The notification information means notifies the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the notification stop means stops the notification of the number of special information by the notification execution means. Also, it is provided with other notification execution means (function to execute the processing of step S1107 and step S1205 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for continuing notification of the number of the special information by the notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6.

  According to the feature D7, even if the notification of the number of special information based on the control of the notification execution unit is stopped, the notification of the number of special information in the notification unit is continued. It becomes easy for a person etc. to recognize that communication abnormality of command information has occurred.

  Feature D8. The special information number grasping means continues to grasp the number of the special information even when the notice stopping means stops the notice of the number of special information by the notice executing means. Any of the features D1 to D7, characterized in that, based on the reception of the recognition information, the information of the number of the special information grasped is updated in correspondence with the received number recognition information. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature D8, even when the notification of the number of special information based on the control of the notification execution unit is stopped, the second control unit continues to grasp the number of special information. Thereby, after the situation where the notification of the number of special notifications is stopped is released, the notification of the number of special information can be successfully restarted.

  Feature D9. The notification stopping unit cancels the state in which the notification of the number of special information by the notification execution unit is stopped based on the reception of the command information. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature D9, it is possible to prevent the situation where the notification of the number of special information based on the control of the notification execution unit is stopped for a long period of time.

  Note that “the command information transmitted from the first control means has been received” includes not only a configuration in which the command information is directly received from the first control means, but also a signal path between the first control means and the second control means. The configuration having the relay means above also includes a configuration for receiving the command information transmitted from the first control means and relayed by the relay means.

  Further, the “first control means” is not limited to the configuration composed of a single control device, and may be composed of a plurality of control devices. Similarly, the “second control means” is a single control device. It is not limited to the structure which consists of control apparatuses, The structure which consists of a some control apparatus may be sufficient.

  Moreover, you may apply the structure limited in any one of the said characteristics A1-A32, the said characteristics B1-B20, and the said characteristics C1-C18 with respect to the structure of any one of the said characteristics D1-D9. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means Then, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and the gaming machine gives a privilege to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 31 ... Symbol display apparatus as display means, 33 ... Main display part as notification means, 60 ... Main control apparatus as 1st control means, 62 ... MPU, 90 ... 2nd control means Audio lamp control device, 100 ... display control device constituting second control means, 102 ... display side MPU, 103 ... program ROM, 104 ... work RAM, 121 ... various counter areas, 121a ... counter area for game times, 141 ... Ring buffer, 142... Reserved information number storage area, 151... Input port, RE... Reserved area as acquisition information storage means, SA1 to SA9.

Claims (9)

A display unit, a first control unit and a second control unit;
Based on the information transmitted from the first control means, the display means is controlled by the second control means so that a special display is performed,
The first control means includes
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, Information determination means for sequentially performing the determination for a plurality of special information;
Number recognition information transmitting means for transmitting number recognition information which is information used when the second control means grasps the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
With
The second control means includes
Special information number grasping means for grasping the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means based on receiving the number recognition information;
Based on the grasp result of the special information number grasping means, a notification executing means for notifying the display means of the number of the special information;
Even in a situation where the number of the special information grasped by the special information number grasping means is 1 or more, the special execution information of the special information by the notification executing means is based on the fact that a predetermined stop condition is established. Notification stopping means for stopping the notification of the number;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: A display unit, a first control unit and a second control unit;
Based on the information transmitted from the first control means, the display means is controlled by the second control means so that a special display is performed,
The first control means includes
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, Information determination means for sequentially performing the determination for a plurality of special information;
Based on the determination by the information determination means, information transmission means for transmitting command information corresponding to the determination result;
Number recognition information transmitting means for transmitting number recognition information which is information used when the second control means grasps the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
With
The second control means includes
Special display execution means for causing the display means to execute a special display corresponding to the received command information, based on receiving the command information;
Special information number grasping means for grasping the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means based on receiving the number recognition information;
Based on the grasp result of the special information number grasping means, the notification executing means for notifying the number of the special information on the display means or a display means different from the display information;
Even if the number of the special information grasped by the special information number grasping means is 1 or more, the notification is performed based on the fact that a predetermined stop condition is established after the execution of the special display. Notification stopping means for stopping notification of the number of the special information by the execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:   The notification canceling means is based on the fact that the command information is not received until the stop condition is satisfied in a situation where the number of the special information grasped by the special information number grasping means is 1 or more. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the notification of the number of the special information by the execution unit is stopped.   The notification stopping means newly displays the special display after the previous display on the display means is ended, even though the number of the special information grasped by the special information number grasping means is 1 or more. From the establishment of the condition based on the fact that it is possible to start, based on the fact that the situation in which the command information is not received continues for a reception abnormality period, the establishment of the cancellation condition is performed by the notification execution unit. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the notification of the number of special information is stopped.   The notification stopping means does not receive the command information from the establishment of a condition based on reception of the number recognition information corresponding to the new acquisition of the special information in a situation where the special display can be newly started. 5. The notification according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the notification execution unit stops the notification of the number of special information as the establishment of the cancellation condition based on the fact that the notification has continued for an abnormal reception period. The gaming machine described. The first control unit includes a period determining unit that determines a display continuation period of the special display related to the special information determined by the information determining unit based on the determination result by the information determining unit,
In the situation where the measurement of the display continuation period determined by the period determination unit is not completed, the information determination unit does not newly perform the determination.
The special information number grasping means grasps based on receiving the command information or based on receiving the number recognition information transmitted based on the determination made by the information determining means. Updating the special information to reduce the number of the special information,
The notification stopping unit is configured to execute the special information from the execution of the special display until the number of the special information grasped by the special information number grasping unit is updated. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 5, wherein the number of notifications is stopped.   The notification information means notifies the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the notification stop means stops the notification of the number of special information by the notification execution means. The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, further comprising other notification executing means for continuing notification of the number of the special information by the notification means.   The special information number grasping means continues to grasp the number of the special information even when the notice stopping means stops the notice of the number of special information by the notice executing means. 8. The information of the number of the special information that is grasped is updated in correspondence with the received number recognition information based on the reception of the recognition information. A gaming machine according to claim 1.   3. The notification stopping unit cancels the state in which the notification of the number of special information by the notification execution unit is stopped based on the reception of the command information. 8. The gaming machine according to any one of 8.

Images